ES-3000, GeodeTM and

StrataVisorTM NZ/NZC
Operator’s Manual
P/N 28519-01 Rev K

This manual corresponds to SCS Version 8.18

Download latest version of this manual here:

ftp://geom.geometrics.com/pub/seismic/Geode-NZ

Geometrics Inc.
2190 Fortune Dr
San Jose, CA 95131
Phone 408.954.0522 • Fax 408.954.0902
Web Site: www.geometrics.com
EMAIL:[email protected]
Seismodule Control Software (ESOS, SGOS, MGOS, MARINE, etc.) Registration by
Facsimile or Email

Upon installation of Seismograph Control Software (SCS), you will encounter a registration
window that requires a password to proceed.

Please complete the following form

if you wish to fax us the user
software code reported in the
registration window. We will return
fax you the registration number. If
you prefer to use email, please
address your message with the same
information to
[email protected]
with a subject heading of “SCS
ACTIVATION.” Please don’t
forget your serial number!

Note: You can use the software for

32 hours before you need to register
it. Simply press the Cancel button,
and then choose which software
bundle you would like to run.

Note that if the computer you are registering is on the Internet, you can send email directly from
within the registration dialog box. If the computer is not on the Internet, you can save the user code
and registration information in a separate file and attach that to an email sent by a different
computer.

Once you receive your registration number from Geometrics, you can use this same dialog box and
paste the registration number into the appropriate spaces using the Paste From Clipboard button
shown above.

2
DATE:

TO: Geometrics Seismic Sales

2190 Fortune Drive
San Jose, CA 95131 USA

TELEPHONE NO.: 1-408-954-0522

FAX NO.: 1-408-954-0902

USER NAME:

USER FAX NO.:

USER TEL NO.:

USER EMAIL:

ES-3000/NZ/GEODE S/N:

OS:

USER CODE:

Geometrics will send you a reply facsimile with your password. For any other service questions,
please contact [email protected].

REGISTRATION NUMBER:

3
CE December 6, 2001

San Jose, California, USA

01
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, Geometrics, Inc.
Geometrics Europe
2190 Fortune Dr.
San Jose, CA 95131 USA
Ph: (408) 954-0522
FAX: (408) 954-0902

Declare under our sole responsibility that our seismograph StrataVisor models NZC,
NZII/0, NZII/8 through NZII/64, ES-3000, and Geode models to which this declaration
relates are in conformity with the following standards as these units operate from
batteries under 15VDC:

EN 55011: 1998, A1:1999, EN50082-2: 1995, ENV 50140: 1994, ENV 50141: 1994,
EN 61000-4-2 : 1995, EN 61000-4-4 : 1995

per the provisions of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC of May

1989 as Amended by 92/31/EEC of 28 April 1992 and 93/68-EEC, Article 5 of 22 July
1993.

The authorized representative located within the Community is:

Geometrics Europe
Christopher Leech
Manor Farm Cottage
Galley Lane
Great Brickhill
Bucks.MK17 9AB, U.K.
ph: +44 1525 261874
FAX: +44 1525 261867

__________________________
Mark Prouty, President,
San Jose, CA, USA

4
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 12
1.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................... 12
1.2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL ................................................................................................... 13
1.3 STRATAVISOR™ NZ, GEODE™ AND ES-3000 CONFIGURATIONS ................................ 14
1.3.1 StrataVisor NZ and NZC ....................................................................................... 14
1.3.2 Geode Configurations ........................................................................................... 14
1.3.3 ES-3000 Configuration.......................................................................................... 15
1.4 ES-3000/GEODE/NZ QUICK START GUIDE ................................................................... 16
1.4.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 16
1.4.2 Setting Up Your Laptop ......................................................................................... 16
1.4.2.1 Installing the PCMCIA Card ............................................................................. 16
1.4.2.2 Installing the Software....................................................................................... 16
1.4.3 Connecting the System Together ........................................................................... 16
1.4.4 Set Up Your Survey Parameters ............................................................................ 21
2 FIRST TIME OPERATOR’S OVERVIEW..................................................................... 22
2.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 22
2.2 PREPARATION AND SETUP ............................................................................................. 23
2.2.1 ES-3000/Geode -- Installing Network Cards and Software .................................. 23
2.2.2 StrataVisor NZ and NZC Systems.......................................................................... 23
2.2.3 Unpacking the Instruments.................................................................................... 23
2.2.4 What Comes With The Geode/ES-3000 Seismic System?...................................... 23
2.2.5 What Comes With StrataVisor NZ Seismic System................................................ 24
2.2.6 Other Recommended Accessories.......................................................................... 24
2.3 CONNECTING IT ALL TOGETHER ................................................................................... 26
2.3.1 StrataVisor NZ and NZC ....................................................................................... 26
2.3.2 Geode..................................................................................................................... 26
2.3.3 StrataVisor NZ and Geodes Together ................................................................... 27
2.3.4 ES-3000 ................................................................................................................. 29
2.3.5 Connecting the Trigger and Geophone Connections to Either Instrument ........... 29
2.4 STARTING YOUR SEISMIC SYSTEM ................................................................................ 30
2.4.1 Starting the Geode................................................................................................. 30
2.4.2 Starting the StrataVisor NZ/C ............................................................................... 31
2.4.3 Starting the ES-3000.............................................................................................. 31
2.4.4 Getting Around in the Menus................................................................................. 32
2.5 GEODE, ES-3000 AND STRATAVISOR NZ OPERATING SOFTWARE ............................... 33
2.5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 33
2.5.2 Starting the Software for the First Time on Your Laptop...................................... 36
2.5.2.1 Software Checkout and Registration ................................................................. 36
2.5.2.2 Startup and Configuration Screens .................................................................... 38
2.5.3 Starting the Software for the First Time on the StrataVisor NZ/C. ....................... 41
2.5.4 The StrataVisor NZ / Geode Operating Software Main Screen ............................ 41
2.5.4.1 Noise Monitor Window ..................................................................................... 42
2.5.4.2 Shot Window ..................................................................................................... 42
2.5.4.3 Log File Window............................................................................................... 43
2.5.4.4 Status Bar........................................................................................................... 43
2.5.4.5 Menu Structure and Getting Around ................................................................. 44
2.5.5 Beginning a Survey................................................................................................ 45
2.5.5.1 Setting System Parameters ................................................................................ 45

5
 2.5.5.2 Geometry ........................................................................................................... 46
2.5.5.3 Acquisition ........................................................................................................ 48
2.5.5.4 Data Display ...................................................................................................... 52
2.5.5.5 Identifying the First Arrival Of Seismic Energy – Picking First Breaks........... 54
2.5.5.6 Saving Your Data .............................................................................................. 55
2.5.5.7 Printing Paper Copies ........................................................................................ 56
2.5.6 Improving and Customizing Your Data................................................................. 57
2.5.6.1 Signal Enhancement .......................................................................................... 57
2.5.6.2 Freeze ................................................................................................................ 57
2.5.6.3 Other Display Modes......................................................................................... 59
2.5.6.3.1 AGC ............................................................................................................ 60
2.5.6.3.2 Use of the Filters ......................................................................................... 61
2.5.6.4 Using Delay ....................................................................................................... 63
2.5.6.5 Reducing the Number of Acquisition Channels ................................................ 64
2.5.7 Storing Data .......................................................................................................... 65
2.5.8 Answers ................................................................................................................. 65
2.5.8.1 SIPQC................................................................................................................ 65
2.5.8.1.1 Selecting First Break Pick Files .................................................................. 67
2.5.8.1.2 Layer Assignments...................................................................................... 68
2.5.8.1.3 Running the Interpretation .......................................................................... 69
2.6 SUMMARY ...................................................................................................................... 70
3 SOFTWARE AND INTERACTIVE MENUS .................................................................. 71
3.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 71
3.2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR SYSTEM............................................................. 72
3.3 RUNNING SGOS OR MGOS SOFTWARE FOR THE FIRST TIME ...................................... 72
3.4 ACCESSING THE MENU STRUCTURE USING THE FRONT PANEL KEYPAD ON THE
STRATAVISOR NZ. .................................................................................................................... 73
3.4.1 Color Screen.......................................................................................................... 73
3.4.2 Functions of the Keys ............................................................................................ 73
3.4.2.1 Hot Keys............................................................................................................ 73
3.4.2.1.1 Global Hot Keys.......................................................................................... 74
3.4.2.1.2 Local Hot Keys – Shot Window Selected ................................................... 75
3.4.2.1.3 Local Hot Keys - Noise Window Active .................................................... 75
3.4.2.1.4 Local Hot Keys - Pick Window Active....................................................... 75
3.4.2.1.5 Local Hot Keys – Log Window Active....................................................... 75
3.4.3 External Keyboard and Laptop Keyboard............................................................. 75
3.4.3.1 Using Keyboard Short Cuts to Get Around Menus ........................................... 76
3.5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF MENUS .............................................................................. 77
3.5.1 Survey Log Window............................................................................................... 79
3.5.2 Noise Display Window .......................................................................................... 79
3.5.3 Shot Record Display Window ................................................................................ 80
3.5.4 Spectral Window MGOS............................................................................................ 81
3.5.5 Gather Windows MARINE .......................................................................................... 82
3.5.6 Trigger Timing Window with Gun Energy Monitor MARINE .................................... 82
3.5.7 Noise Window MARINE.............................................................................................. 83
3.5.8 Geometry Graphical User Interface...................................................................... 83
3.6 STATUS BARS ................................................................................................................ 84
3.6.1 Main Menu Bar...................................................................................................... 84
3.6.2 Bottom Status Bar.................................................................................................. 85
3.7 INTERACTIVE MENUS .................................................................................................... 86

6
3.7.1 Survey .................................................................................................................... 86
3.7.1.1 New Survey ....................................................................................................... 86
3.7.2 Geometry ............................................................................................................... 87
3.7.2.1 Survey Mode ..................................................................................................... 87
3.7.2.2 Group Interval ................................................................................................... 87
3.7.2.3 Group/Shot Locations........................................................................................ 88
3.7.2.3.1 Navigation in the Geometry Dialog Box..................................................... 88
3.7.2.3.2 Entering new values in the geometry fields ................................................ 89
3.7.2.3.3 Shot Coordinate........................................................................................... 89
3.7.2.3.4 Geophone (Group) Interval ......................................................................... 90
3.7.2.3.5 Geophone Coordinates ................................................................................ 90
3.7.2.3.6 Channel Use ................................................................................................ 90
3.7.2.3.7 Setting up a simple active spread in preparation for ROLLING................. 91
3.7.2.4 Phone Increment................................................................................................ 91
3.7.2.4.1 Phone Increment: Reflection Surveys Using Mechanical Roll Switch ....... 91
3.7.2.4.2 Phone Increment: Reflection Surveys Using Built In Software Roll .......... 92
3.7.2.4.3 Phone Increment for Refraction Surveys .................................................... 92
3.7.2.5 Shot Increment................................................................................................... 92
3.7.2.6 Gap .................................................................................................................... 93
3.7.2.7 Automatically Rolling Channels ....................................................................... 93
3.7.3 Observer ................................................................................................................ 94
3.7.3.1 Edit Survey Description .................................................................................... 94
3.7.3.2 New Line Number ............................................................................................. 94
3.7.4 Acquisition............................................................................................................. 96
3.7.4.1 Acquisition Timing............................................................................................ 96
3.7.4.2 Correlation MGOS................................................................................................. 97
3.7.4.3 Acquisition Filters ............................................................................................. 98
3.7.4.3.1 Data Filters .................................................................................................. 98
3.7.4.3.2 Pilot Spiking FilterOPTIONAL ......................................................................... 98
3.7.4.4 Stacking ............................................................................................................. 99
3.7.4.4.1 Stacking With AutoSave ON ...................................................................... 99
3.7.4.4.2 Stacking With AutoSave OFF................................................................... 100
3.7.4.5 Specify Channels ............................................................................................. 101
3.7.4.6 Preamp Gains................................................................................................... 102
3.7.4.7 Stack Polarity................................................................................................... 102
3.7.5 File....................................................................................................................... 103
3.7.5.1 Storage Parameters .......................................................................................... 103
3.7.5.2 Eject TapeMGOS................................................................................................. 104
3.7.5.3 Read Disk ........................................................................................................ 104
3.7.5.4 Read TapeMGOS................................................................................................. 104
3.7.6 Display................................................................................................................. 106
3.7.6.1 Shot Parameters ............................................................................................... 106
3.7.6.1.1 Display Boundary...................................................................................... 106
3.7.6.1.2 Gain Style.................................................................................................. 106
3.7.6.1.3 Trace Style ................................................................................................ 108
3.7.6.1.4 Display Gains ............................................................................................ 108
3.7.6.1.5 Display Filters ........................................................................................... 109
3.7.6.2 Spectra Parameters MGOS .................................................................................. 109
3.7.6.2.1 Display Boundary MGOS ............................................................................. 110
3.7.6.2.2 Trace Style MGOS ........................................................................................ 110
3.7.6.2.3 Analysis Parameters MGOS .......................................................................... 111

7
 3.7.6.2.4 Display Gains MGOS .................................................................................... 111
3.7.6.3 Noise Monitor Parameters ............................................................................... 112
3.7.6.4 Gather Parameters MARINE ................................................................................ 112
3.7.6.5 Trigger Parameters MARINE ............................................................................... 113
3.7.6.6 Noise Parameters MARINE .................................................................................. 113
3.7.6.7 Geometry Tool Bar Display Settings............................................................... 114
3.7.7 Do Survey ............................................................................................................ 115
3.7.7.1 Arm/Disarm..................................................................................................... 115
3.7.7.2 Clear Memory.................................................................................................. 116
3.7.7.3 Shot Location................................................................................................... 116
3.7.7.4 Noise Display .................................................................................................. 116
3.7.7.5 Trace Display................................................................................................... 116
3.7.7.6 Auto Scale Traces............................................................................................ 116
3.7.7.7 Save ................................................................................................................. 117
3.7.7.8 Print Shot Record ............................................................................................ 117
3.7.7.9 Q.C. Correlate MGOS ......................................................................................... 118
3.7.7.10 Restore All Windows .................................................................................. 118
3.7.7.11 Roll Channels Up/DownMGOS ...................................................................... 119
3.7.7.12 Freeze Channels........................................................................................... 120
3.7.8 Window ................................................................................................................ 121
3.7.9 Answers ............................................................................................................... 122
3.7.9.1 Pick Breaks...................................................................................................... 122
3.7.9.2 Solve Refraction Using SIPQC ....................................................................... 123
3.7.9.2.1 Selecting First Break Pick Files ................................................................ 123
3.7.9.2.2 Layer Assignments.................................................................................... 124
3.7.9.2.3 Running the Interpretation ........................................................................ 125
3.7.9.3 Launch Oyo First Break Picker ....................................................................... 126
3.7.9.4 Launch OYO Refraction Analyzer .................................................................. 126
3.7.10 Print..................................................................................................................... 127
3.7.10.1 Shot Print Parameters .................................................................................. 127
3.7.10.2 Spectra Print Parameters MGOS ..................................................................... 128
3.7.11 System .................................................................................................................. 129
3.7.11.1 Set the Date, Time, and Units...................................................................... 129
3.7.11.2 Trigger Options ........................................................................................... 129
3.7.11.2.1 Trigger Holdoff ....................................................................................... 129
3.7.11.2.2 Arm Modes.............................................................................................. 129
3.7.11.2.3 Trigger Sensitivity................................................................................... 130
3.7.11.2.4 StrataVisor NZ and Geode Self-Triggering ............................................ 130
3.7.11.2.5 Self-Triggering, Detailed Description..................................................... 132
3.7.11.2.6 Continuous Recording............................................................................. 135
3.7.11.3 Test .............................................................................................................. 135
3.7.11.3.1 Run Analog TestMGOS .............................................................................. 135
3.7.11.3.2 Geophone Test MGOS ................................................................................ 136
3.7.11.3.3 Update Acquisition Board Bios (LOADER)........................................... 138
3.7.11.4 Enabling Repeaters and Disabling Acquisition Cards MGOS ........................ 142
3.7.11.5 Serial I/O MGOS ............................................................................................. 143
3.7.11.6 Manual Trigger............................................................................................ 144
3.7.11.7 Configuration Status.................................................................................... 144
3.7.11.7.1 Configuration Status Menu ..................................................................... 144
3.7.11.7.2 Error Conditions Shown By the Configuration Status Menu.................. 146
3.7.11.7.3 Signaling at a Specific Geode ................................................................. 147

8
 3.7.11.8 Alarms ......................................................................................................... 147
3.7.11.9 Calibration Mode......................................................................................... 148
3.7.11.10 Channel Remapping .................................................................................... 148
3.7.11.10.1 Default cable wiring of Geometrics seismographs................................ 148
3.7.11.10.2 Multiple Geodes .................................................................................... 149
3.7.11.10.3 Multiple Network Lines ........................................................................ 149
3.7.11.10.4 Automatic Channel Remapping ............................................................ 150
3.7.11.10.5 Manual Channel Remapping................................................................. 150
3.7.11.11 Sounds ......................................................................................................... 151
3.7.11.12 Advanced System Options .......................................................................... 151
3.7.11.12.1 Enable ADC High Pass Filter................................................................ 151
3.7.11.12.2 Enable Subsample Trigger Synchronization ......................................... 151
3.7.11.12.3 Enable Continuous Acquisition............................................................. 151
3.7.11.13 Version Number .......................................................................................... 152
3.7.11.13.1 Changing registered options.................................................................. 152
3.7.11.14 Close Controller........................................................................................... 152
3.8 THE GEOMETRY GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE .......................................................... 154
3.8.1 Visual Attributes .................................................................................................. 154
3.8.2 Control Functions................................................................................................ 156
3.8.2.1 Shot location.................................................................................................... 156
3.8.2.2 Geometry Tool Bar Display Setting ................................................................ 158
3.8.2.3 Select Geophone Cable Type .......................................................................... 159
3.8.2.4 Zoom ............................................................................................................... 161
3.8.2.5 Dock ................................................................................................................ 162
3.8.2.6 Geode Status.................................................................................................... 162
3.8.2.7 Ping Geode ...................................................................................................... 163
3.8.2.8 Set Geode as Master Trigger ........................................................................... 163
3.8.2.9 Select Geophone Cable Type .......................................................................... 163
3.8.2.10 Disable Data Channel .................................................................................. 163
3.8.2.11 Enable Channel............................................................................................ 163
3.8.2.12 Set Channel to High Gain............................................................................ 163
3.8.2.13 Set Channel to Low Gain ............................................................................ 164
3.8.2.14 Scrolling ...................................................................................................... 164
3.8.2.15 Selecting Multiple Channels........................................................................ 164
3.8.2.16 Tool Tips ..................................................................................................... 166
3.8.2.17 Channel Remapping Assistance .................................................................. 166
4 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES .............................................................................. 170
4.1 EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES FOR OPERATION ........................................................ 170
4.1.1 PC Requirements ................................................................................................. 170
4.1.1.1 Memory Requirements..................................................................................... 170
4.1.1.2 CPU Requirements .......................................................................................... 170
4.1.2 Power................................................................................................................... 170
4.1.3 Blink Codes.......................................................................................................... 171
4.1.4 Connecting Geodes To Your Laptop Or StrataVisor NZ..................................... 171
4.1.4.1 Digital Interface Adapters (network adapters) ................................................ 171
4.1.4.2 Digital Cable Considerations........................................................................... 173
4.1.5 Interfacing the StrataVisor NZ to External Devices............................................ 174
4.1.5.1 Connecting Internal PC to an External Network ............................................. 174
4.1.5.1.1 Old Style NZ with RJ45 external connector ............................................. 174
4.1.5.1.2 NZII systems with multiple external network ports.................................. 175

9
 4.1.5.2 Setting up Network Protocol On NZ Internal PC............................................ 175
4.1.5.3 Integrating Two StrataVisor NZ Computers for Use as One System.............. 175
4.1.5.3.1 Configuring the Slave ............................................................................... 175
4.1.5.3.2 Configuring the Master NZ ....................................................................... 176
4.1.5.4 Connecting a StrataVisor NZ to the end of a string of Geodes ....................... 177
4.1.6 The Energy Source .............................................................................................. 178
4.1.7 Geophone Cables................................................................................................. 180
4.1.7.1 Cables for Refraction Surveys......................................................................... 180
4.1.7.2 Cables for Reflection Surveys ......................................................................... 181
4.1.8 Geophones ........................................................................................................... 182
4.2 THE STRATAVISOR NZ SEISMOGRAPH .................................................................... 184
4.2.1 Display................................................................................................................. 184
4.2.1.1 Display Fall Asleep Mode Switch (Power Save) ............................................ 184
4.2.1.2 Changing Screen Resolution for External Devices ......................................... 184
4.2.2 Printer ................................................................................................................. 185
4.2.2.1 Loading Paper.................................................................................................. 185
4.2.2.2 The Print Header.............................................................................................. 185
4.2.3 Data Acquisition and Sampling........................................................................... 185
4.2.4 Triggering............................................................................................................ 187
4.2.5 Environmental Considerations ............................................................................ 187
4.2.6 Connector Wiring ................................................................................................ 189
4.2.6.1 Geophone Connector ....................................................................................... 189
4.2.6.2 Power Connector ............................................................................................. 192
4.2.6.3 Start Connector................................................................................................ 192
4.2.6.4 Digital Interface Connector ............................................................................. 193
4.3 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................... 194
4.3.1 Power................................................................................................................... 194
4.3.2 External Keyboard Problems .............................................................................. 194
4.3.3 Sensor Problems.................................................................................................. 194
4.3.4 Print Problems..................................................................................................... 194
4.3.5 Trigger Problems................................................................................................. 195
4.3.6 Digital Cabling Problems.................................................................................... 195
4.3.7 Hardware/ Software Error Messages.................................................................. 195
4.3.7.1 Cannot find empty data element for new data. ................................................ 195
4.3.7.2 DSP code download failed .............................................................................. 196
4.3.7.3 Cannot create Ethernet port ............................................................................. 196
4.3.7.4 No acquisition board detected ......................................................................... 196
4.3.7.5 Incomplete data on file .................................................................................... 196
4.3.7.6 Could not convert geode # to acquisition # ..................................................... 196
4.3.8 StrataVisor NZ Internal System Problems........................................................... 196
4.3.8.1 CMOS Settings for the Geometrics StrataVisor NZ........................................ 196
5 FILE STORAGE AND DATA HANDLING .................................................................. 198
5.1 FILE FORMAT ............................................................................................................... 198
5.1.1 SEG-2 File Structure ........................................................................................... 198
5.1.1.1 File Descriptor Block ...................................................................................... 200
5.1.1.2 Trace Descriptor Block.................................................................................... 202
5.1.1.3 Data Block ....................................................................................................... 203
5.1.1.4 String Format................................................................................................... 203
5.1.1.5 Key Words Used in File Descriptor Block ...................................................... 203
5.1.1.6 Key Words Used in Trace Descriptor Blocks.................................................. 204

10
 5.1.1.7 SEG-2 File Format Example ........................................................................... 207
5.1.2 SEG-D File Structure .......................................................................................... 209
5.1.2.1 SEG-D File Format Example .......................................................................... 210
5.1.3 SEG-Y File Structure........................................................................................... 211
5.2 STORAGE CAPACITY .................................................................................................... 212
5.3 SUPPORT DISKS ........................................................................................................... 213
5.3.1 Loading the seismic program .............................................................................. 213
6 APPLICATIONS............................................................................................................... 214
6.1 CONTINUOUS SEISMIC RECORDING USING THE GEOMETRICS GEODE ........................ 214
6.1.1 Continuous Recording Using GPS Clock and Trigger Timing Interface ............ 215
6.1.1.1 Hardware Setup ............................................................................................... 215
6.1.1.1.1 GPS: .......................................................................................................... 215
6.1.1.1.2 GPS Trigger Timing Interface................................................................... 216
6.1.1.2 Software Setup................................................................................................. 216
6.1.1.3 Timing ............................................................................................................. 218
6.1.1.4 Alarm............................................................................................................... 219
6.1.2 Continuous Recording Using The Internal PC Clock ......................................... 220
6.1.2.1 Software Setup................................................................................................. 220
6.2 SUB-BOTTOM PROFILING ............................................................................................ 222
6.3 SURVEILLANCE ............................................................................................................ 222
APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................ 224

APPENDIX B. PCMCIA CARD AND SOFTWARE INSTALLATION............................. 227

APPENDIX C: SAMPLE DATA ............................................................................................. 232

APPENDIX D: APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE THAT SHIPS WITH THE GEODE AND

STRATAVISOR NZ SEISMOGRAPHS. ............................................................................... 233

11
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview

The ES-3000, Geode™ and StrataVisor™ NZ employ a new concept in

portable exploration seismographs. They combine the ruggedness and high
signal quality of a distributed system with the convenience and cost
effectiveness of personal computer-based control devices.

The Geode is a highly portable, stand-alone distributed seismic module weighing only 6 to 9
pounds. It uses a fraction of the battery power of conventional seismographs, which also reduces
battery weight. The Geode can be controlled with any PC-based computer running an appropriate
version of the Windows™ operating system.

The ES-3000 has a similar form factor to the Geode, but is designed more for simple refraction
surveys and monitoring applications where wide bandwidth and long recording length are less
important. The ES-3000 has no correlator and cannot connect to other ES-3000 modules; it is
available in under 24 channel configurations only.

The StrataVisor NZ has the form factor of a conventional seismic recorder - an integrated color
screen, keypad and built-in printer. The NZ can be configured as either

• a rugged, stand-alone personal computer with no internal channels to control the

Geode(s).
• a conventional, integrated seismograph, fitted internally with the same rugged Geode
A/D boards to build a conventional exploration seismograph.
• both a conventional seismograph with internal channels and a Geode controller,
operating both simultaneously.

The Geode and StrataVisor NZ combine simplicity of use with remarkable

improvements in capability. Exceptional dynamic range and 20 kHz
bandwidth make these seismographs ideal for reflection, refraction, borehole
and other specialized seismic surveys.

12
1.2 About this Manual

This manual is divided into several sections. These are summarized in the table below.

Section Description
1. Introduction You are reading it – about the manual, how systems can
be configured. Includes a section for the Impatient User
– The fastest way to get going.
2. First Time First Time Operator’s Guide. All the details about what
Operator’s Overview comes with your system, how to connect it together,
how to start it, how to do a survey.
3. Software and Detailed description of the menu system.
Interactive Menus
4. Hardware and A discussion of hardware and accessories. Includes a
Accessories section on troubleshooting.

5. File Storage and Storing and transferring data; supported SEG formats.
Data Handling

6. Applications Applications Overview: discusses different types of

surveys that can be undertaken with this instrumentation
and provides guidelines.
Appendix A - Instrument Specifications.
Specifications

Appendix B – Network and software installation, installing the

PCMCIA Card and PCMCIA network card in your laptop, installing a
Software Installation network card in another PC control device.
Appendix C – Sample Installing sample data on your seismograph system.
Data

Appendix D – Overview of applications software that ships with the

Applications Software Geode and StrataVisor NZ systems.

If you are new to the ES-3000/Geode/StrataVisor but are an experienced hand at seismic surveying,
you may wish to skim Section 2 for setup instructions, or refer to the Appendices for installation
instructions. Section 3 contains a detailed explanation of the menus, while the remaining sections
and appendices provide supplementary and reference information.

13
The ES-3000/Geode/StrataVisor NZ seismographs are software-controlled devices which will
receive periodic enhancements. Thus, it is possible that the menus and operating instructions in this
manual may differ in minor respects from those on your instrument. As a general rule, operating
menus will be self-explanatory and this will not cause any inconvenience or confusion. The current
versions of both the manual and software are always available for download at
ftp://geom.geometrics.com/pub/seismic.

Note: The warranty is not valid until you register your software with Geometrics. We
welcome comments on the instrument and suggestions for improvements in this manual.
Feedback from our users is extremely important to Geometrics.

1.3 StrataVisor™ NZ, Geode™ and ES-3000

Configurations

1.3.1 StrataVisor NZ and NZC

The StrataVisor NZ can be configured either as a field-rugged personal computer with no internal
channels (called the NZC) or can include up to 64 seismic channels
within the same chassis. The NZ and NZC have a daylight visible color
screen. The StrataVisor NZ/NZC operates from a 12 V power supply.

The StrataVisor NZ/NZC can also connect and control up to 4 lines of

Geode seismic modules via one or more built-in high-speed network
interfaces. The NZ/NZC comes with software that is already configured
for multiple Geode operation (MGOS).

All NZ/NZCs are shipped from the factory configured for immediate
operation.

1.3.2 Geode Configurations

Geode seismic modules must be controlled from a remote personal

computer via a network connection. Your laptop computer, equipped with
an appropriate PCMCIA card makes a suitable controller; for surveys
where reliability in harsh environments is critical, a StrataVisor NZ/NZC
is optimal. In fact, any Windows-based computer (check
www.geometrics.com for supported
versions) is a candidate for a controller,
provided it has appropriate network
connections. Single Geode modules from 3 to 24 channels used
for engineering surveys are controlled using Single Geode
Operating Software (SGOS).

Multiple Geodes can be connected together to build larger

systems. In situations where distances larger than 250 m are
required between modules, individual Geode modules can be

14
used as repeaters. Multiple Geode operation requires the Multiple Geode Operating System, or
MGOS. MGOS has a much greater range of features than SGOS, and is designed for more
sophistocated surveys. Please refer to the data sheet or Section 3 in this manual for an in-depth
discussion of the differences.

The StrataVisor NZ and Geode can be configured many different ways. Consult the factory and
talk to our applications specialists to discuss the optimal configuration for your survey.

Geodes can also be controlled by a standard desktop controller acting as a server. This may be the
preferred configuration when considering many lines with multiple Geodes.

Geodes can be connected in parallel to a host computer (similar to the multi-line configuration
shown above) to increase throughput. This is particularly useful for marine applications where
fast cycle times are required.

1.3.3 ES-3000 Configuration

The ES-3000 has a similar form factor to the Geode, but is designed more for simple refraction
surveys and monitoring applications where wide bandwidth and long recording length are less
important. The ES-3000 has no correlator and cannot connect to other ES-3000 modules; it is
available in under 24 channel configurations only.

15
1.4 ES-3000/Geode/NZ Quick Start Guide

1.4.1 Introduction
This section is for the impatient user that simply wants to plug the new Geode/ES-3000 system
together and start experimenting. We know your type – you are experienced with computers, the
earth sciences and have a busy day ahead of you. We empathize – but beware. Skim through
subsequent sections to ensure that there aren’t any gaps in your knowledge. And even though you
probably won’t read this manual, we encourage you to simulate a small survey BEFORE going
out to the field. Set up the geometry, play with the acquisition parameters, collect some records
and experiment with the display parameters. There are some sample data on one of the disks that
came with your system, so read them in and try picking and processing. You will be glad you did.

1.4.2 Setting Up Your Laptop

1.4.2.1 Installing the PCMCIA Card

See Appendix B for instructions regarding the installation of your PCMCIA card.

1.4.2.2 Installing the Software

You will need to install the Seismodule Control Software (SGOS or MGOS) on your computer, if
you did not purchase your laptop from Geometrics. Installing the Seismodule Control Software
should be painless. Please follow the instructions in Appendix B.

Note: SCS Version 8.18 and works with Windows 98, 98SE, ME, NT, W2000 and XP – not
Windows 95. For customers using Windows 95, an older version of the software is available
(version 7.15). Check ftp://geom.geometrics.com/pub/seismic/Geode-NZ frequently for new
software versions and updates.

1.4.3 Connecting the System Together

• Connect the 12V power to the connector with the symbol

16
 • Connect the geophone spread cables and the trigger
input to the connectors with the symbols shown below.
Note that you will need an adapter cable if you have
12-channel cables with Cannon NK27 connectors.

• Connect the digital interface cable to the ES-3000/Geode.

You will recognize the digital interface cable as the one
with identical MIL connectors on either end, neither of
which have pins. Geodes have both an input and output

digital connector, so you will want to connect to the one

with the OUT symbol (above), which indicates data is transmitted OUT of the Geode
toward the storage and control device. The ES-3000 has only one digital connector.

• Connect the other end of the digital interface cable to the connector on the small
network interface box (NIB). It is a small box, 5-cm square, with a pinless MIL
connector on one side for the ES-3000/Geode interface cable and an RJ45 connector
on the other. Connect the RJ45 connector to the network connection on your
controller PC.

Note: If you are using a StrataVisor NZ field

seismograph/computer you can plug the Geode
digital cable directly into one of the pinless
connectors on the side. No NIB is necessary.

Note: Some configurations use a rugged field case

with the laptop installed inside. The network
interface cable is mounted on the outside of the
case and the NIB and PCMCIA cards are
protected in the case. Connect to the external
connector in this instance.

• If you have other Geodes, connect

them at this time as well, with the OUT connector closest to the controller. Multiple
Geodes are connected in the following fashion:

17
 NIB

• Turn on the power at each Geode. This can be accomplished by either

• pressing the green pushbutton marked with a 0/1 on the side of each Geode/ES-
3000.
• pressing the toggle switch on the NIB (if present) to the Power Up position
(only works in conjunction with remote power-up Geodes)

Power Up Power Battery

Down Test

• pressing the red pushbutton (only on remote power-up Geodes) labeled TEST on
the side of the Geode closest to the controller. With this last method, you must
start the seismic control software within 20 minutes or the Geodes will
automatically turn off to save power.

Note: If you have an ES-3000, it does not have a power switch. It powers up as
soon as it is plugged in to the battery.

The bright blue power LED next to the power connector on the ES-
3000/Geode(s) should immediately start flashing once every 3 seconds,
indicating that the device(s) have powered up. The blue LEDs next to the ES-
3000/Geode output connector will flash once every 3 seconds, indicating that the
network is connected and communicating. If you controller PC has one, the LED
next to the ethernet connection should also be lit or flashing.

Note: With remote power-up Geodes, unless you push the TEST button on the
first Geode in the network, only the first Geode will power up when you move the
toggle switch on the NIB to the Power Up position. The rest will power up when
you start the SCS software.

• Turn on your computer.

Note: Systems shipped with a laptop included or with a StrataVisor NZ will have the
user name set to SEISMIC and the password set to blank.

18
• Start the Seismic Control Software by double clicking on the icon. If this
is the first time the software has been started (just after installation), or if the software
has not yet been registered, you
will be presented with the screen
to the right. Send in the User
Code and we will send you a
registration number. Press
Cancel to continue using the
software for 32 hours.

There are many operating tools available with the Seismic Control Software. These
features include marine mode, earthquake monitoring, self-trigger, VSP, continuous
recording, Mini-Sosie and others. During the 32- hour grace period, you can try out
all features, even if you have not purchased them. To try all options, select Or Try
Super Seis (All Features Enabled). When you receive your password, only the
options that you purchased will be enabled.

19
After registering your software or pressing Cancel, you should see a display similar
to one shown below.

Run your finger over the pins of the geophone inputs or tap the ground to see changes
on the noise monitor.

Note: If the digital interface connection is

not working, or if the ES-3000/Geode power
is not turned on, you will get the message
shown on the right.. The software will
indicate that you do not have acquisition
boards, permitting you to explore some
parts of the software, with limitations.

20
1.4.4 Set Up Your Survey Parameters
As your seismic system is starting up, you will see the blue LEDs blink quickly, indicating that
the on-board ES-3000/Geode program is resetting and the program is being loaded. If all
connections are verified, the LEDs will change their blink rate to once every 7 seconds to
conserve power, but to alert you that all communication is normal.

The operating software will continue to load and will display system status and communication
parameters. You will then be presented with a series of menus, starting with the screen below,
which allows you to specify your survey parameters.

Your system should now be operational. If you have

difficulties, refer to Appendix B for installing your
PCMCIA card and network initialization, or to
Section 4 for hardware troubleshooting.

You may now proceed with your survey. Detailed

instructions on software operation can be found in
Section 3.

Hot Tip: Refer immediately to the Hot Key list (see

the Do Survey menu) to review available shortcut
keys. Commit these to memory. They can improve
field productivity dramatically.

Happy surveying!!

21
2 First Time Operator’s Overview

2.1 Introduction

This chapter is written for less experienced users of exploration seismographs. It is not intended
to teach fundamental geophysics. If you consider yourself an experienced user of modern
exploration seismographs, you may wish to go directly to Section 3, for details of the software
and its operation.

The operator should read the application literature and applications CD sent with the instrument,
as well as standard textbooks on geophysics.1

This section will focus on the instrument, its use, and a few things not found in textbooks. We
will simulate collecting a sample refraction record as an example of a typical acquisition
sequence. The chapter is general enough that those planning on doing reflection, down-hole,
cross-hole or other types of measurements should find the material instructional. You should also
read Section 3 which contains detailed explanations of the operation of each menu, and Section 4,
which provides details on the actual hardware: seismograph, geophones, cables, etc.

For first time use, keep things simple. Practice first in a comfortable office to gain thorough
familiarity with the menus and equipment. Then, the first practice survey should be a refraction
survey, done close to home, with a sledgehammer source, and short geophone spread (3 meters or
10 feet) between geophones. Section 2 is written with this elementary setup assumed, and the
operator can extrapolate this experience to more complex surveys and those using explosive or
other types of sources.

1
Exploration Geophysics of the Shallow Subsurface, by H. Robert Burger, 1992, published by Prentice
Hall, ISBN 0-13-296773-1
Dobrin, M.B. and Svait, C.H., 1988. Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting, 4th ed., McGraw-Hill Book
Company, New York, New York.
Reynolds, J.M. 1997. An Introduction to Applied and Environmental Geophysics, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, New York.
Yilmaz, O., 1987. Seismic Data Processing, Investigations in Geophysics No. 2, Neitzel, E. (ed) Society of
Exploration Geophysicists, Tulsa, Oklahoma.
Telford, W.M., Geldar, L.P. Sheriff, R.E., 1990. Applied Geophysics, 2nd Ed., Cambridge University Press.

22
2.2 Preparation and Setup

2.2.1 ES-3000/Geode -- Installing Network Cards and Software

If you have purchased a Geode/ES-3000 seismic module and plan on using it with a laptop or
other customer-supplied PC control device, you must first install:

• Either the Geometrics-supplied or a Geometrics-approved PCMCIA network card in your

laptop running Windows 98, 98SE, ME, NT, 2000 or XP.

• A Geometrics approved network card if you are using some other type of PC control device

• The software drivers supplied with the network card.

• The Geode/ES-3000 operating system software (either ESOS, SGOS or MGOS versions) to
communicate with the seismic module via the network.

See Appendix B for details.

2.2.2 StrataVisor NZ and NZC Systems

If you are using a StrataVisor NZ, NZC or a combination of StrataVisor NZ/NZC and Geode in-
field modules purchased from Geometrics, all appropriate operating software will come
previously installed in the StrataVisor NZ/NZC for operating internal channels and/or external
Geode modules. MGOS software will automatically detect all Geodes connected to them.

2.2.3 Unpacking the Instruments

Unpack the system and gather your accessories. You will need a 12-volt battery if one was not
purchased with the system. The Geode/ES-3000 uses about 0.6 W per channel while operating.
The StrataVisor NZ, with an integrated PC, uses 0.6W/channel plus approximately 40 W,
depending on the installed processor. A 10 to 15 amp-hour battery will operate the Geode/ES-
3000 for several hours, but a larger battery, the marine deep cycle variety, is suggested for the
NZ. For the Geode/ES-3000, purchasing motorcycle batteries are a good and inexpensive choice
but care must be taken to keep them upright. If you will be travelling by air, consider a gelled
acid battery or purchase batteries locally on arrival. Check with the airline to determine local
regulations as many batteries are considered hazardous goods.

2.2.4 What Comes With The Geode/ES-3000 Seismic System?

The ES-3000/Geode comes standard with several accessories. Check and make sure that you see:

• ESOS, SGOS or MGOS (Seismic Controller Software, SCS) purchased

separately
• Power cable with alligator clips
• Quick start manual for seismograph
• Operators manuals for applications software

23
 • PCMCIA interface card for your laptop (comes with software)
• Small RJ45 to PCMCIA interface cable (comes with PCMCIA card)
• For the Geode:
• Geometrics RJ45 to Geode Digital Cable Network Interface Box (NIB).
There are two versions of the NIB for the Geode. The NIB comes with SCS
software.
o With remote power up switch on one side
o Without remote power up switch
• Geode Digital Interface Cable(s) (Geode only)
• For the ES-3000:
• A digital interface cable with an RJ45 connector on one side and a connector
on the other side that connects to the ES-3000
• Hammer/trigger switch (typically attached to the energy source like a hammer)

2.2.5 What Comes With StrataVisor NZ Seismic System

The StrataVisor NZ comes standard with several accessories. Check and make sure that you see:

• Power cable
• Quick Start Manual and disks for seismograph
• Operators manuals and disks for applications software
• Hammer/trigger switch (typically attached to the energy source like a hammer)
• Printer paper
• Seismic Controller Software

The StrataVisor NZ seismograph comes standard with modified MGOS (Multiple Geode
Operating Software) already installed. It is capable of controlling either internal NZ channels or
Geodes connected externally via the high speed digital network cable. There are different
versions of NZ seismographs:

1. NZ case style: Geodes connect via a network interface box (NIB) to an RJ45
connector on the back of the instrument chassis (near the power switch). Allows
control of a single line of Geodes.

2. NZII/NZC case style: two or four waterproof network connections on the left side of the
instrument chassis.

2.2.6 Other Recommended Accessories

In addition, you will need several other accessories for undertaking a survey. These will
vary depending on what you have purchased type of survey that you wish to undertake.

• Laptop computer or StrataVisor NZ seismograph to control the Geode.

• Geophones (typically 3 or more depending on configuration)
• Spread cable (with connections for attaching the geophones)
• Trigger extension cable (to communicate a trigger start to the Geode)
• Seismic energy source: hammer, explosive, mechanical weight drop, vibrator or
pseudo random (MiniSosie) source

24
 • Seismic timer (blaster) for detonating explosives
• CD burner or tape drive for data storage

Other optional accessories might be used in the field. For example, if you are using a laptop
computer, additional batteries or a cigarette lighter adapter to your car are advised along with the
chargers that accompany them. Tape measures and surveying equipment are necessary to ensure
accurate positioning of the geophones.

25
2.3 Connecting It All Together

The flexible GeodeTM and StrataVisorTM NZ seismograph connect to accessories in fundamentally

the same way. All connectors are keyed so it is not possible to connect them incorrectly.

2.3.1 StrataVisor NZ and NZC

Refer to the adjacent figure which shows the location
of connectors on the StrataVisor. First, connect the
12V power connector to the rear of the ‘top hat’
assembly that houses the screen and keyboard. It is a
silver 3-pin plug on the back. Make sure that the
battery has sufficient charge to last for the duration of
the experiment.

2.3.2 Geode
Refer to the opposing figure to find the location of the connectors on the Geode. First
connect the power cable to the power input connector, marked with the symbol

Next, locate the Geode interface cable. It has two identical pinless connectors on
each end. If you look closely at the connector, you will see 10 pads that are used
to make the connection. Either end of this cable can be used. Attach one end of
the digital network interface cable from the NZ or laptop to the Geode output
network connector marked with the symbol

When making the connection, it can only be inserted in one orientation.

Note: It helps to align the longer metal tab on the outside of the connector towards the lid of the
Geode or to the top of the NZ controller. Rotate the connector until it snaps into place.

Note: The input and output symbols on the Geode refer to the transmission of the DATA. Data
are always being transmitted back to the controller.

If you have other Geodes, connect them at this time as well, with the output connector closest to
the PC control device or to the next Geode.

26
Multiple Geodes are connected in the following fashion:

NIB

If you have remote power-up Geodes (red pushbutton), you can test the digital link between
adjacent Geodes after you have connected both ends of the digital interface cable. Depress the
red pushbutton to temporarily start the Geodes. They will stay powered up for about 30 minutes
to allow you to walk to the next Geode in the line. If the digital cable is working correctly and
communications are established, the blue light beside each connector will flash. The PC control
device does not have to be connected for this function to operate.

Geode digital interface cables are available as either lightweight, or with an abrasion resistant
coating. Maximum digital cable lengths are as follows:
o 250 m length between Geodes
o 250 m between the first Geode and an NZ with internal channels on the same line
o 100 m between network connections on NZ’s with no channels
o 100 m between the first Geode(s) and an NZC
o 100m between a laptop and the first Geode

If you are using a laptop, connect the other end of the Geode Digital Interface Cable to
the connector on the small Network Interface Box (NIB). It is a small box, 5 cm square
with the same pinless connector on one side and an RJ45 connector on the other side.
Connect the RJ45 connector to your laptop’s network PCMCIA connector.

Some configurations use a rugged field case with the laptop installed inside, available
from Geometrics. The Network Interface Cable is mounted on the outside of the case and
the NIB and PCMCIA cards are protected in the case. Connect to the external connector
on the case in this situation.

2.3.3 StrataVisor NZ and Geodes Together

The StrataVisor NZ can be used to control external Geode modules as well as to have its own
internal channels. Follow directions in the section below for connecting the StrataVisor NZ to
Geodes.

There are different methods of attaching Geodes to the NZ, depending on the case style.

1. Case style NZ has an RJ45 on the back of the chassis, near the power connector.
To attach Geodes to this style of chassis, you will need a Geode/NZ network

27
 interface box (P/N 28102-03) that has a wire with an RJ45 connector that plugs
into the NZ and a MIL connector that accepts the Geode digital interface cable.

2. Case style NZ II has MIL connectors (they have 10 flat contacts instead of pins) mounted
directly on the side of the chassis that accepts the digital interface cable directly. No
network interface box is required.

Connect the other end of the digital interface cable (s) to the output connector of the Geode(s)
that you wish to control. This connector is marked with the symbol

indicating that data are being transmitted back to the NZ.

Note that modern NZ/C systems already have the remote start capability already built in, so
Geodes will automatically start when power is switched on. Older NZs operating with remote
start Geodes may require a special interface box. Please contact Geometrics for advice.

28
2.3.4 ES-3000
Refer to the opposing figure to find the location of the connectors on the ES-3000. First connect
the power cable to the power input connector, marked with the symbol

Next, locate the ES-3000 interface cable. It has one pinless connectors on one end and a RJ-45
(network) connector on the other end. If you look closely at the big connector,
you will see 10 pads that are used to make the connection. Attach one end of the
digital network interface cable from the laptop to the ES-3000 output network
connector marked with the symbol

When making the connection, it can only be inserted in one orientation.

Note: It helps to align the longer metal tab on the outside of the connector towards the lid of the
ES-3000. Rotate the connector until it snaps into place.

Note: The input and output symbols on the Geode refer to the transmission of the DATA. Data
are always being transmitted back to the controller.

2.3.5 Connecting the Trigger and Geophone Connections to

Either Instrument
Connect the trigger cable to the ES-3000/Geode/NZ and the opposite end to a hammer switch that
will be used to trigger the seismograph. The connectors have specific polarity, so cannot be
confused. When laying out the trigger cable, we recommend separating the trigger line and the
spread cable by at least 2 meters to avoid inductive coupling. If you know the distance to your
furthest shot, pull enough cable off the trigger reel to reach this location before connecting the
other end of the cable to the triggering device, typically a hammer switch. This device will
provide a start pulse to tell the seismograph to start recording.

Attach the geophone spread cable(s) to the connectors on the Geode/ES-3000/NZ. If you are
using a Geode/ES-3000, you will see a single Bendix connector with 61 pins so all 24 channels
can be brought in on one connector. If you are using a StrataVisor NZ, you may see 1 or 2
Cannon NK-27 connectors or you may have ordered your system configured with 1 or 2 Bendix
61 pin connectors (typically used for more than 24 channels).

Geode/ES-3000 seismographs are configured as ‘high-side’

devices, meaning that they should always be connected nearest to
the highest numbered channel. In fact, most cables are wired so ‘High-Side’ Cable
that they can be oriented in either direction, but the Geode/ES- and
3000 should still be situated at the highest ground station it is Geode Orientation

29
used to measure. The channels will be reversed if this rule is not followed. This is not a tragedy,
but may require some additional work in the data processing to orient the channels correctly.
If you have older style Cannon connectors and you wish to use them with a Geode/ES-3000, you
can purchase them with an adapter that allows you to position the Geode/ES-3000 in the middle
of the spread (called ‘split-spread’) so that all of your older refraction cables can reach the
instrument without the need for additional jumpers.

Split Spread Cable

Remember, if you are using a Geode/ES-3000 and are more comfortable operating nearest the
first channel, you can simply reposition your laptop. The digital interface cable can be at least
110m long.

Plant the geophones firmly (by pressing the spike into the ground) by each connector (called a
takeout) on the cable. Connect the geophones to the spread cable. The geophone connectors will
have a method to encourage proper polarity connections (such as wide and narrow color-coded
clips).

2.4 Starting Your Seismic System

You are now ready to start your seismograph and make sure that everything is working.

2.4.1 Starting the Geode

There are two different ways of turning on Geodes, depending on their vintage:

1. Classic style Geodes have a green pushbutton on one side, marked with a 0/1
symbol. This pushbutton must be depressed to turn each Geode on. The blue
LED adjacent to the power switch will start flashing every 3 seconds,
indicating that the Geode is in standby mode. The blue light should be clearly
visible, even in bright sun.

2. Remote style Geodes have a red pushbutton on one side. If you are using a laptop to
control your Geode, you will need a network interface box (NIB) that comes
supplied with a remote start toggle switch located on the side. Push the toggle to the
Enable Power Up position. This sends the start signal to the first Geode(s) is the line(s)
so that the entire line can power up when the seismic controller software is started .

30
 Enable Enable Battery
Power Up Power Test
Down

Alternately, remote start (red button) Geodes can be started for 20 minutes by pressing
the red test button on the side of the first Geode in the line. This is a handy way of
ensuring that the digital cables are connected and working as you are laying out the line.
No coordination with the controlling PC is required.

If you are using a StrataVisor NZII or NZC as a controller, no NIB is required and remote
start Geodes will power up automatically.

Next, if it isn’t already on, start your laptop, StrataVisor NZ or PC control device that will be
used to operate the Geode. It may be necessary to turn your Geodes on first before turning on the
NZ/C. It is not necessary to turn on Geodes first if you are using a laptop.

After the PC has been turned on and your network card is active, you will see the bright blue LED
near the digital interface output cable attached to the Geode start to flash every 3 seconds if the
interface is working properly. If the power and output interface LEDs are not flashing, go to the
troubleshooting section in Chapter 5.

Start the operating software by double clicking on the icon on the desktop. The LED’s
on the Geode will briefly flash very quickly, indicating that the software is being
downloaded and the circuitry is being initialized. If you have multiple remote start
Geodes connected on the line, they will all power up at this time.

You may be presented with a registration screen on your PC. If so, follow the instructions
(discussed later in this chapter) and contact Geometrics with your registration number so we can
give you a permanent access code and register your warranty. You will have about a 32 hours of
use before the license expires.

2.4.2 Starting the StrataVisor NZ/C

Turn on the power switch located near the 12V power connector on the StrataVisor NZ. The NZ
will perform like an industry standard PC at the point, going through the boot sequence,
displaying the desktop, then eventually starting the seismograph program. If your NZ is not
configured to boot into the seismograph program, start the program now by double-clicking on
the appropriate icon.

2.4.3 Starting the ES-3000

Simply plugging in the ES-3000 to the battery will automatically power on the ES-3000. It does
not have a button or switch to press.

31
2.4.4 Getting Around in the Menus
Seismic Controller Software has been written to allow operation with either a numeric keypad,
such as found on the StrataVisor NZ, or a pointing device like a touch pad or a mouse. Although
most of the MGOS and SGOS software follows WindowsTM convention, there are some keyboard
anomalies that are worth noting:

• The TAB moves among groups or classes of selections when in a specific menu. If not in
a menu, the TAB key selects the currently available windows – shot, spectra, noise or log
window.
• The ARROW keys move between individual selections, and can be used to move within
numerical fields. The arrow keys are used to move between coordinate locations in the
coordinate location menus found in the Geometry and Do_Survey menus.
• The “.” (period) key or SPACE bar can be used to select check boxes
• The ENTER key usually confirms menu choices or exits a menu
• The ESC key exits menus without making any changes
• All main menus can be accessed by using the ALT key and the number preceeding the
menu item.
• There are many HOT KEYS available to facilitate fast operation of the system. Refer to
the hot key section in Chapter 2.

32
2.5 Geode, ES-3000 and StrataVisor NZ Operating
Software

2.5.1 Introduction
The remainder of this chapter will focus on operation of the software for acquiring seismic data.
The main program for operating the NZ or Geodes is known as the Seismic Controller Software
(SCS). Within SCS there are many options that can be enabled by the factory, depending on your
configuration and application. For convenience, we have grouped these options into two main
categories:
• ES-3000 Operating Software (ESOS)
• Single Geode Operating Software (SGOS)
• Multiple Geode Operating Software (MGOS)
• Marine Multiple Geode Operating Software (MMGOS)

ESOS is primarily used for refraction and other small surveys. It is similar to SGOS in operation

SGOS software has functions necessary for the collection, processing and interpretation of
engineering-style geophysical surveys. SGOS can control from 3 to 24 channels in a single box.

MGOS software runs either on a laptop computer, or comes standard on the StrataVisor NZ
seismograph. It contains all of the functions found in SGOS, as well as all of the additional data
management protocol required for larger scale surveys with large numbers of channels or large
numbers of Geode modules and multiple lines. The following table summarizes the differences
between the two software packages.

33
 ESOS on SGOS on Laptop MGOS on Laptop NZ/C (comes standard Comments
Laptop with ES- with Geode with Geodes with MGOS)
3000
No. of Channels 8 and 12 3 to 24 3 to > 500 3 to > 240 Number of channels limited
Per Line only by practical data size

No. of Geodes 1 1 Many Many

No. of Lines 1 1 Typically 2 Up to 4 MGOS operates up to 16 lines
on desktop computer

Sample Intervals 64µs to 2ms 20µs to 16ms 20µs to 16ms 20µs to 16ms
Record Length 4K 16K 16-64K 16-64K
Geophone Testing No No Yes Yes

Analog Testing Not available Not available Available as built in or Available as built in or Future
external external

Data Formats SEG2 SEG2 SEG2/Y/D SEG2/Y/D

OS Win98/NT/2K/XP Win98/NT/2K/XP Win98/NT/2K/XP Win98/NT/2K/XP 95 version available on web
site
Data Storage Locally on OS Locally on OS Writes to DAT, DLT, Writes to DAT, DLT,
structured media structured media 3480, 3490 etc 3480, 3490 etc

Hardware Correlator No Yes Yes

Bandwidth See sample 1.7 Hz to 20 kHz 1.7 Hz to 20 kHz. 1.7 Hz to 20 kHz. Lower
rates Lower corner available corner available
Repeater No No Yes Yes

Preamp Gain 24 and 36 dB 24 and 36 dB 12/24 dB or 24/36 dB 12/24 db or 24/36 db or gains are software selectable,
software software or 0 dB 0 db gain pairs are jumper
selectable selectable selectable
Roll Capability No No Yes Yes
Real-Time Spectral No No Yes Yes
Display

This manual describes all configurations of software simultaneously, as ESOS and SGOS are
subsets of MGOS. Marine MGOS (MMGOS) has additional features. Sections of the manual that
describe features that are exclusive to MGOS will be shown with MGOS as a superscript in the
section heading, shown as follows:

2.x.x This is a section describing an MGOS feature MGOS

Features that are specific to Marine MGOS have the superscript MARINE . In addition, there are
several additional options that can be purchased separately. These features are designated in the
manual with an OPTIONAL superscript. This list of options is ever- expanding, so please contact the
factory or check our web site for the latest updates.

34
 Option Description
Self-triggering for blast, earthquake, security Calculates the ratio between a short term and
and vibration monitoring long term moving average of a continuous data
stream transmitted by the Geodes/NZ. When
an event is detected, the seismograph is
triggered and a record is taken and the user-
selected sample rate.
Spike filter for use with pseudo-random Debounces and spikes the pilot used for
(MiniSosie) swept sources correlation in a MiniSosie survey
Single trace gather window Plots a single trace from each shot. Excellent
for marine, sub-bottom profiling, VSP or
tomography surveys
Spectral Window Calculates spectra of last shot
Channel Roll Roll along for reflection surveys
Geophone Test Bounces geophones to look for faults
Tape Drive Support Supports SCSI Tape devices
Automatic Tape Drive Switching Switches between tapes when full
Multiple Geode Control Allows multiple Geodes on multiple lines
Correlation Hardware or software correlator for swept or
pseudo-random (MinisSosie) surveys
Self-triggering with GPS time synchronization Uses external GPS to provide time stamp when
the system triggers.
Continuous recording Records data continuously and stores data in
files with user-defined record lengths
Sub-bottom profiling Enables high-speed cycling option
Marine Surveying / VSP Adds several marine-related windows for data
QC: single trace gather windows, noise bar
graph, shot timing bar graph, gun energy bar
graph, alarms.

35
2.5.2 Starting the Software for the First Time on Your Laptop
Start by making sure that your ES-3000/Geode(s) or NZ are turned on. This is accomplished
either by pressing the button on the side or by turning on the toggle switch on the network
interface box close to your laptop. NZ’s have a rocker switch located on the back right-hand-side
of the chassis. You will be able to verify the Geode/ES-3000s have turned on by observing the
flashing blue power light (about once every 3 seconds). If properly connected, the digital
interface LED connecting the first Geode/ES-3000 to the laptop will also be flashing.

Start the E/S/MGOS software by double clicking on the appropriate icon if you have not already
done so. It will take several seconds to establish communication with the acquisition boards,
which conduct internal tests and load the seismic software. During this period, the LED’s on the
Geode/ES-3000 will occasionally flash very quickly, indicating that the software is loading and
the circuitry is being reset. In order to start your survey, a series of initial menus are presented
that contain basic information concerning the setup of the instrument, the geometry of your
geophones and file storage parameters.

Remember! The Geode/ES-3000s MUST be turned on and properly connected to the

computer control device when you start E/SGOS or MGOS
operating software. If it is not, the software will not start
and you will be presented with the menu opposite. You will
be able to run some portions of the software, but to activate
your Geodes, simply turn on the Geode and restart the
software by returning to the desktop and double-clicking on
the icon.

2.5.2.1 Software Checkout and Registration

If this is the VERY FIRST TIME you

have run the software and everything is
working properly, you will be presented
with a menu asks you if you would like to
register the software. Follow the on
screen directions and email Geometrics
the user code and other required
information so we can send you your
official registration number. (If it is not
the first time, you will probably be
presented with the shot, log and noise
windows).

Write down the user code number shown

on your screen (not the one shown in this
manual) and phone, email or fax it to

36
Geometrics. We will give you a registration number that will make your software fully
operational. Please include your name, your organization, the serial number of the Geode/ES-
3000 and your address (including email) so we can properly register the software.

Note that if you are connected to the Internet while operating your Geode/ES-3000, you can email
directly from within the registration screen. If you are not connected to the Internet, you can save
pertinent information to a file and email it from another computer.

Now press the CANCEL button, so you can continue to use your seismograph while you are
waiting to get your registration number. You will be able to operate the software for 32 hours
before requiring the registration number.

After pressing CANCEL, you will be presented with a menu that allows you to select the
configuration that you have purchased. If you have a single Geode, check the Single Geode radio
button. If you are operating several Geodes select MGOS, etc.

If you are adventurous and would like to explore all available options for 32 hours, select the ‘Try
Super Seis’ option.

Once you receive your registration number, you can copy and paste it into the registration number
space, rather than having to type it in. The options that you have purchased are encoded into the
registration number.

37
2.5.2.2 Startup and Configuration Screens

Once the software has started, the following series of menus will appear. A status monitor also
shows information about the system, how many boards are found and a variety of other things

Select a survey name and line number that will

help you remember that this is a test survey.
Press Enter or click OK for each of these menus
to proceed.

The next menu refers to the operation of the

correlator for vibrator surveys. Press OK to
continue.

The next menu details stacking options. Make sure

that Auto Stack is selected, and stack limit is set to 0.
These options are discussed in more detail in a later
section.

Next, you can choose a sample interval and record length. Since
this is a small survey, we recommend 0.25 ms sampling and a
record length of 0.2 seconds.

38
 The next menu allows you to choose acquisition filters.
Press OK to continue.

Next, the menu showing the distance between geophones

is displayed. Select an appropriate interval for this initial
test. We

recommend 3 meters or 10 feet. You can edit this

later, if necessary.

The next menu to be displayed will set the preamp gains. Select 36
db for this initial test. Preamp gains can be adjusted individually
in a subsequent menu.

The next menu in the initial sequence

of menus shows the layout of your line.
Note the schematic of the line at the
top of the box, the shot coordinate, and
the automatic calculation of the offset
distance between the shot and first
geophone. Default geophone
coordinates are already entered for
you; these can be edited later, as
described in the section on geometry
below.

39
 You will now be presented with the file parameters
menu. Here you have an opportunity to determine
in what directory your files are to be saved and the
initial file number that is used to start the file
sequence. Subsequent file save operations will
simply increment this number. We recommend
choosing a directory that reflects today’s date, and a
file number that is in the thousands – like 5000.
This helps reduce possible duplications. On the
StrataVisor we recommend saving to drive D:.

The observer’s log is the last menu in the initial startup

sequence. Fill in the information pertinent to your job and
the survey here. You will now have reached the
operating screen from which you will record seismic data.

If you have multiple Geodes, you will want to tell

the software where your trigger is attached.
Specify the correct line and Geode number.
Geodes are counted starting from the controller.

40
2.5.3 Starting the Software for the First Time on the StrataVisor
NZ/C.
The StrataVisor NZ/C comes preconfigured to boot and run the MGOS software, including
whatever other options you have purchased. MGOS will automatically find and install all Geodes
and internal channels in your system. If for some reason you must install the software, you will
be presented with a series of initial menus, detailed in the previous section.

2.5.4 The StrataVisor NZ / Geode Operating Software Main

Screen
When the seismic operating software starts, you will be presented with the following screen:

Your screen may not look exactly the same, as the windows may be in a different position. You
can resize and reposition any of the windows as you would any other Windows-based program.
You will see a

• Noise Monitor window that continually displays the output from the geophones,

• Shot window that will be initially blank that will display the results of the data acquisitions
• Log window that displays a record of your survey and the activities that you have undertaken.
The log file is handy for reviewing the events that happened during course of a survey,
particularly if there is any confusion later concerning what might have taken place.

41
• A spectral window if you are running MGOS software.

2.5.4.1 Noise Monitor Window

First, turn your attention to the noise monitor by

clicking on the top menu bar. It will darken to show
you that it has been selected. The A/D converters in the
hardware are continually measuring the voltages
generated by vibrations at the geophones. These
voltages are displayed as a continually refreshed
waterfall display. Use the up and down arrow keys to
adjust the sensitivity of the noise monitor. You will see
the amplitude of the traces change. Adjust them so that
the maximum amplitude occupies about half of the
trace spacing. A millivolt scale bar on the upper right
hand corner will change, calibrating the trace amplitude
that causes deflection on the display.

If your geophones are connected to the seismograph

and you are standing close to them, tap your foot on the
ground. The vibrations should register on the noise
display. If your geophones are not yet connected, run your fingers over the input connectors. A
similar response will occur on the display, indicating that the A/D circuitry is active.

2.5.4.2 Shot
Window

When you first start the seismic

software, the shot window will
be blank since no data have been
recorded. The figure shown here
displays the window after data
has been collected

The top of the window displays

current parameters: sample rate
(SI), record length (RL), delay
time, the stack count, the storage
status (whether unsaved, read
from disk or current recorded file
name). Above the output from
each channel is the channel
number and also the display gain. Along the left hand side of the screen is the time scale,
displayed in seconds. Many of these parameters can be changed in the DISPLAY menu, to be
discussed later.

42
2.5.4.3 Log File Window

The log file keeps a record of your activities when you undertake a survey. Instrument settings,
shot and geophone location, status of files and any errors that occur are all listed here. The file is
saved on disk under the survey name that you choose so that you can return to the file later for
reference. The file can be read using the standard notepad editor that comes with Windows.

2.5.4.4 Status Bar

Across the bottom of the SCS window, there is a status bar shown with important information
regarding the mode that the software and hardware may currently be in.

The leftmost box displays the system status, an important part of the survey. Possible status
messages include:

Status Description
Armed Ready to acquire data
Disarmed Data acquisition disabled
Acquire Collecting data on A/D cards
Busy Undertaking system management
Sending data Transferring data from A/D cards to computer
Receiving Pilot Getting pilot from pilot channel
Sending Pilot Transferring pilot to A/D cards to use correlator
Processing Data Undertaking correlation or other signal processing

The next box indicates whether sampling is underway on the A/D cards.

The 3rd box indicates the display mode for the shot window.

The 4th box displays the stack count.

The 5th box displays the status of the data, which can include:

Memory Clear
Unsaved Stacked Data
Saved as file xxx.dat (Stacked Data)
Saved as file xxx.dat (Correlated Data)

43
The 6th box displays the current location of the shot.

2.5.4.5 Menu Structure and Getting Around

The structure of the seismic software follows closely the pattern that our users have tested and
approved through past generations of Geometrics seismographs. A menu bar at the top of the
screen is ordered from left to right to follow a typical survey setup procedure.

Survey sets up the survey name

Geom sets up the type of survey to be done, the position of the shots and
geophones and the pattern of movement
Observer stores accounting information about the survey
Acquisition configures the seismic recording parameters like record length and sample
rate
File defines storage parameters
Display determines how the data is displayed
Do Survey contains the majority of operations for undertaking a survey. Most operators
will spend most of their time in this window after initial set up
Answers processing and interpretation options
Print configures hard copy output
System configures the trigger, allow setting of the date, attaching of other Geodes
etc.

All of these menu items are discussed individually in Section 3.

44
2.5.5 Beginning a Survey

Some of the screens you will see below may be duplicates from above, if you had started your
software for the first time. Position the cursor over Survey in the top left corner of the screen.
You will be asked to start a New Survey:

Enter a Survey Name and Line Number that are pertinent to your job. You will see these entries
reflected in the Survey Log window, to help keep track of the progress of your survey. You will
be able to review the log file at a late date if you need to recall anything.

2.5.5.1 Setting System Parameters

There are some SYSTEM parameters that should be set

before starting. Select the SYSTEM menu on the far right
hand side of the menu bar.

Select the first

item titled Set
Time/Date/Units
and set the time
and select
whether you are working in Feet or Meters. The
calculations done for units are not actually dependent
on whether you select feet or meters. This information

45
is simply kept for your records, it is not specifically used in the calculations.

Make sure you set the time correctly as each of the data files will use this time for record keeping.

Next, it is necessary to make sure that the

trigger is properly configured. If you are
connecting your trigger to the StrataVisor NZ
system without external Geode channels
connected, this will not be necessary. If you are
attaching a trigger to a Geode, you should make
sure that the software identifies which Geode
the trigger will be coming from. From the
system menu, select Trigger Options, and
inspect the adjacent menu:

Select the number of the Geode that the trigger

line is connected to. The Geode closest to the
controller is number 1. If you have multiple lines, you must select which line you are connected
to.

2.5.5.2 Geometry

The location of your shot and the

geophones must be recorded
each time you acquire data with
the Geode or NZ seismograph.
Traditionally, this was done on
paper but the Geode operating
software allows you to do this
directly in the seismograph
program.

Although it is not absolutely necessary to enter these positions in order to do a survey, it is

required if you plan to use the analysis functions in the Answers menu, which you will see later
can give you answers right in the field.

You will need to first set the distance between geophones and the shot location. Select the
GEOM menu from the menu bar.

First, set the SURVEY MODE to refraction for this exercise.

When you are in Refraction Mode, the seismic

software treats some of the data scaling
operations differently. Autoscaling operations
are done based on the amplitude of the noise
before the first breaks to minimize the amount of
manual scaling that may be necessary.

Reflection Mode trace autoscaling is done by

normalizing each trace to the maximum value of

46
the trace shown on the display.

Next set the Group Interval. The Group Interval

or geophone spacing refers to the spacing between
geophones (in more advanced surveys, particularly
reflection surveys, a group of 3-12 geophones is
connected to each channel). Choose an appropriate
geophone spacing. Ten feet or 3 meters would be a
suitable distance to ensure reasonable data.

Note that the header on the window says “This is the group interval of the next file to be
written”. This verbiage is included to differentiate from files that have been previously stored on
disk and read back into menu for viewing. When you have read a file in, the header will read
“This is the group interval of the last file read in.” You will also see this same information on
the window of the next
menu,
Group/Shot/Locations.

Gap does not apply to

refraction surveys and is
grayed out. Next, you
must enter the geophone
and shot locations in
your chosen coordinate
system. Choose Group
Shot Locations and you
will see the following:

This window displays

the line geometry as well
as other parameters. For
now, we will stick to
geometry. Gain, Freeze,
and Use will be
discussed in detail in
Chapter 2.

Key in a shot coordinate of zero in the box on the upper left corner of the screen. Then, using
the down arrow key or pointing device, move to the geophone coordinate box of the first
geophone (connected to channel 1), and enter 3 meters (or 10 feet). Move the cursor to the right
one box and the positions will automatically recalculate based on your entry. If you do not wish
this automatic recalculation, you can uncheck the Ripple box in the lower left hand corner and
enter the values for all coordinates manually.

47
You will see that the rest of the
geophone locations have been
set automatically according to
the position of the first and the
Group Interval you entered
earlier (you can view the
positions of the more distant
geophones by moving the
cursor to the right – the
channel numbers and positions
will scroll to the left). The
graphic depiction of the shot
and geophones will now
display your spread, and
indicate the distance between
the shot and the nearest
geophone. Your units are
displayed in the lower right-
hand corner. Note that the
distance or ‘offset’ between
the shot and the nearest
geophone is automatically calculated for you and shown beside the shot symbol. When you are
satisfied, press OK.

Next, make sure Shot Increment and Geophone

Increment are set to zero. These parameters are used to
increment the value of the shot and geophone positions
each time the data are saved, most typically in reflection
surveys. They are not widely used in most refraction
surveys.

Once this is done, you are finished setting up the survey

geometry

2.5.5.3 Acquisition

In seismic data acquisition, electrical signals from the geophones are amplified, digitized, and
stored in the seismograph's memory. The variables which affect the process are selected in the
Acquisition menu. Inappropriate choices of acquisition parameters can be corrected by clearing
the memory, making appropriate changes and repeating the shot.

If you are summing multiple impacts, certain of these settings should not be changed between
hammer blows or shots. Thus, the seismograph will not allow you to change those parameters
when data are in the memory. The
memory must first be erased. If
you attempt to change these
parameters while data is in
memory, you will be asked if it is
OK to clear the memory first.

48
Choose Acquisition to display the acquisition menu:

First, select Sample Interval/Record Length:

Set a Sample Interval of

0.250 ms and a Record
Length of 0.200 seconds.
Leave the Delay at zero
for now, and select OK.
The subject of record
length and sample rate is discussed in greater detail in Chapter
2.

We will not concern ourselves with the rest of the parameters at this point. Stacking is set to
Autostack mode, Unstack Delay is set to 0.

Next, set how channels are used in the

Specify Channels menu. You can see that
this is the same menu that you set up in the
GEOM section, but this time make sure that
all channels in the Use section are set to
DATA. This makes all channels active.

Finally, the last

item to set up
in this section
is Preamp
Gains. For the
purposes of
this exercise,
select All 36 dB. Note that there are other choices, including
Individual. When Individual is
selected, the Gain section of the
previous menu is active and you
can set different preamp gains
for each channel.

Next you must set up the data storage parameters.

Select File then Storage Parameters from the main menu bar
and you will see the menu opposite. Set the Next File
Number to 1200. This will be the name of the first file that
you save. It will increment automatically with each
subsequent save. Disable AutoSave and ensure that Save to

49
Disk is checked so data can be written and select a Path to drive D:

If you are using MGOS software, you will see that you also have the option of saving data in
SEGD and SEGY format. For this exercise, set the Data Type to SEG-2. Please make sure Save
to TapeMGOS is disabled, and select OK. We will skip Display for now and come back to it once
we have collected some data.

Now select the Do Survey option from the main menu

bar to display this menu:

Select Noise Display. This will maximize the noise

monitor window. In the noise display mode, signals from
the geophones are displayed as wiggle traces on the
screen in a waterfall display. Use the up and down arrow
keys to readjust the noise monitor sensitivity, until small
excursions are visible on the traces. The sensitivity is
displayed in the upper left-hand corner; you should see
this change as you press the arrow keys. These trace
excursions represent the background vibrations sensed by each geophone. The screen will display
a set of moving traces, writing the
noise record on the screen. Stomp your
foot on the ground and you should see
a noise burst on the traces generated by
the geophones closest to you. If there
are two people present, one can walk
the line while the other observes the
footsteps on the screen.

This noise display is a useful diagnostic

tool. You can confirm that your cable
and geophones are working properly by
looking for differences among traces. If
you see a trace with considerably more excursions than the others, it may be a bad or noisy
geophone or may indicate that the geophone has been planted improperly. If any of the traces are
straight lines, it may suggest that a geophone is disconnected or that there is a break in the cable.
If it is a windy day, or you are collected data near a road, you can use the noise monitor to
identify quiet periods when your seismic energy source will be most effective.

Let the seismic noise settle a little, and look at the relative amplitudes of each trace on the noise
monitor display. If the geophones are all connected and properly planted, and if the cables are
good, all traces should look about the same. Unusually small or large excursions on any trace are
indicative of some problem that should be investigated. Temporarily disconnect a geophone to
see its effect so you will be able to recognize its effect on the noise display.

The level of background noise can be measured using the scale factor displayed in the upper left-
hand corner. It can be noted as a quantitative measure of background noise.

Your next step is to generate the seismic wave and record it on the instrument. A metal plate
(called a striker plate) is normally used as the impact point for the hammer. Place it on the ground
near the end of the string of geophones, separated from the first geophone by the distance set in
the Geometry menu.

50
If you have not already done so, attach the hammer switch to the hammer, taping it to the top
edge of the handle near the head with stretchy electrical
tape. Note that there is an orientation indication on the
switch itself; make sure to mount the switch with the
black dot against the handle. Tape the wire to the handle
near the hammer switch, and again near the end of the
handle. Connect the hammer switch to the start connector
on the seismograph. Since working with the hammer will
probably trigger the seismograph, clear the memory
(Clear Memory in the DoSurvey menu) again.

The hammer blow should be timed for quiet periods

(when background seismic vibrations decrease) as shown
by the noise display. Advise anyone in the area to stand
still and not talk while recording data. Hit the striker
plate to create a seismic impulse and trigger the seismograph. When swinging the hammer, the
hammer switch should be on the top side of the handle, away from the ground.

If you prefer, the remainder of this exercise can be accomplished using test data found in this
manual, and included on disks shipped with your operating software. Refer now to the section on
installing the sample data in Appendix C.

51
2.5.5.4 Data Display

After a moment or two, the noise monitor record will

disappear and a seismic record will appear in the
shot window. The data display will not be optimized;
perhaps there will be only straight lines, or wildly
overlapping traces. You can initially use the Auto
Scale Traces function on the Do Survey menu as a
first attempt to make the first arrivals of seismic
energy clearly visible.

The data may still not be optimized for

isolating first refracted arrivals. The Display
menu is used to control how the data looks on
the screen. The display functions may be
changed at any time. They do not affect the
original data stored in memory, only the way
it looks on the screen (and the paper plot).

Select the Display menu. It will be used to adjust the look of the data to allow you to better
identify events of significance.

First check the Display Boundary

parameters to make sure that your first
breaks are properly windowed in the
display. Since your geophones are close
together, it is likely that 0.2 seconds is an
appropriate End Time.

52
 Data for a refraction survey are best viewed in
Variable Area or Shaded Area format. We
also recommend checking the Clipped box
which simply displays the data with the tops of
the waveforms cut off. This makes adjacent
refracted arrivals easier to see. The clipping
does not affect the data that is saved to disk or
tape.

Confirm that the Gain Style option is set to Fixed

Gain.

If first refracted arrivals are still not clear, select the

Display Gains option, then select Individual
which will allow adjustment trace by trace. You
can use the arrow keys to adjust each trace size
until the first arrivals are most visible.

Press ESC to remove the menu from the screen and expose the traces. You should see a seismic
record on the screen, similar to the one shown in the figure below. You can time specific events
on the record by using the timing lines on the display.

53
2.5.5.5 Identifying the First Arrival Of Seismic Energy – Picking First
Breaks
The next step in analyzing refraction data is to identify the first
arrivals of seismic energy on each trace. These first arrivals are
identified as the first position where the trace deflects from a straight
line. There is an automatic first break picker in the software that will
help you identify the first break position.

Select the Answers menu from the main menu bar, then the Pick Breaks. This display shown
below will appear:

54
First, you will be asked to roughly identify the beginning and end of the area on the seismic
record that contains the first arrival of energy. A solid and a dashed red line will be shown on the
screen. Use the arrow keys to move the top red line to just above the area that contains the first
arrivals.

Press the TAB key which toggles control to the other red line used to define the bottom of the
pick area. This line is now made solid and can be adjusted to be just below the first break picks.

After you are satisfied with setting the pick boundary, press Enter and the seismograph will
automatically pick the first breaks by putting a red marker on each trace.

The trace for the geophone nearest the

impact point should have clear, early
arrivals. First arrivals on traces from
geophones further away should occur
progressively later in time. An example
record with first break picks is shown
opposite.

The example shown here has particularly

distinct first picks used for illustration -
your data will not be as easy to identify
and the automatic picking will likely
require some adjustment. You will be
offered the option of manually editing the
first break picks. If you choose to do so,
the trace you are operating on will be colored differently and the arrow keys can be used to move
the pick up or down the display. Adjust your picks until they are correctly identified in a manner
similar to the figure here. It may be necessary to again go to the Display menu and adjust the
individual display gains to make the picks easier to see and edit.

After you have selected all of the first arrivals of energy, the picks can be saved on disk by
pressing Enter. The pick file will be saved with the same name as your data file, but with the
extension ‘.bpk’. These files can be retrieved later for interpretation.

2.5.5.6 Saving Your Data

Now would be an appropriate time to save your data to disk to protect it from loss.
Select DoSurvey from the main menu and select the Save option. Opposite the Save
option is the number of the data file to be saved. Once you select this option, your
data will be safe and sound on the storage device. Remember that you should have
the values in the geometry menu properly entered as part of this stored information.

At this point, you may wish to experiment a little with the display functions to
change the look of the record and to gain familiarity with the system. The display gain
adjustments control the excursions of the individual traces on the screen. If necessary, return to

55
the Individual function in the Display Gains submenu to adjust the appearance of the display (see
Chapter 2 if you need directions). Adjusting the Start Time and End Time under Display
Boundary will stretch the waveforms on the screen, so that the first arrivals are easier to pick, or
compress them so that more of the record is visible on the screen. Examination of the entire
record should also show surface waves and perhaps signals from the sound of the hammer
striking the plate.

2.5.5.7 Printing Paper Copies

You can make a paper copy of your data if you are using a StrataVisor NZ seismograph which
has a built-in printer, or if you have a Windows compatible printer connected to your laptop or
PC control device. Make a paper copy by using the Print option in the DoSurvey menu. To
stretch or compress the printed record, go to the main menu bar and select the print Print menu
then experiment with the Normal, Expand, and Compress options in the Shot Print Parameters
submenu. These change the character of the seismic record, and the best choice will depend on a
particular data set and the type of information displayed. Expanding or compressing the record
can compensate for a less than optimum choice of sample rate or record length. On the
StrataVisor NZ and Geode, the print and screen display scales are independent, providing
flexibility in use. The numbers above the traces on the printout are, from top to bottom, the
channel number, display gain multiplier, and preamp gain setting.

Once you have created a hard copy, note the trace display gain multipliers, located underneath the
trace numbers. The numbers are different, with smaller numbers for those traces near the impact
point. Traces away from the impact point will have larger display gain numbers. The display gain
number is related to the scaling applied to the original data to display the traces. Thus, a small
signal (like that from the more distant geophones) will require a larger scale value to make
excursions a useable size.

The display gain numbers are in decibels, or dB, and they change in 3 dB steps from 0 to 150.
Each 3 dB step is an increase of 1.414 times the previous value; 6 dB is 2 times. Thus, the display
gain increments in a logarithmic manner, providing a very wide range of adjustment. Reducing
the display gain decreases the excursions by .707 for −3 dB and by 2 for −6 dB. As a general rule,
you need not concern yourself with these numbers, but they are diagnostic of certain problems.
For example, if a trace is "dead" (shows no excursions) and the display gain value is small, that
means that the display gain is turned down too low. If the number is large, that means the signal
is very small, perhaps from a bad or disconnected geophone or other cause.

As a learning exercise, you can compare the relative strength of the vibrations on each trace. Use
the Equalize Gains option under Display Gains and adjust each number to the same value. Then,
use Adjust All to increase or decrease all the traces simultaneously until the display is scaled to
the best value. The near traces will have very large excursions and the far traces will be straight
lines. In this mode, it is easy to judge the attenuation of the seismic signal with distance from the
impact point. Make a copy if desired, then use the AutoScale Traces and Individual options to
return the traces to a normalized display.

56
2.5.6 Improving and Customizing Your Data
2.5.6.1 Signal Enhancement

The distant traces may be noisy. A noisy seismic trace is caused when extraneous vibrations are
mixed with the signal, sometimes making it difficult to identify the first arrivals. These vibrations
come from wind, vehicles, airplanes, and people. Because the signal on the geophones furthest
from the seismic source are quite small, seismic noise is normally more of a problem on the far
traces.

When working with explosive sources, noise is generally not a problem. If the signals are too
weak, you can employ more explosives for subsequent shots. That is not the case with a
sledgehammer and other mechanical sources; you can only hit the ground with a certain amount
of energy. To extend the depth penetration attainable with a sledgehammer, the StrataVisor NZ
and Geode can add signals from multiple hammer blows. This process is usually called "signal
enhancement" or "summing" or "stacking". The record is saved in the memory, and each time the
ground is hit, the new data are added to the old sum, and the signal grows. Ambient noise is
usually random so the "signal-to-noise" ratio improves as you strike the ground repeatedly. In
practice, the noise increases as the square root of the number of blows, while the signal increases
linearly. Thus, the improvement in the signal-to-noise ratio is proportional to the square root of
the number of impacts. As an example, four stacks are two times better than one, and eight stacks
are three times better than one.

Try summing. First, go to the DoSurvey menu and clear the memory. In the Acquisition menu
set the stack mode to Autostack. Hit the striker plate with the hammer. When you see data on the
screen, swing the hammer a second time. The record should grow larger as two records are now
stacked into the memory. Further impacts should cause the traces to continue to grow, and the
stack count will be updated in the upper right portion of the display. Traces that were noisy will
still be noisy, but a larger seismic signal will be superimposed on the record. Using the display
gain adjustments will shrink the traces back near their original size, and there should be much less
noise relative to signal now. First arrivals should be more distinct and easier to pick, with the
greatest improvement evident especially on those traces distant from the energy source.

Although the StrataVisor NZ and Geode are designed to stack thousands of hammer blows
without problems, there is a practical limit to the improvement available from signal
enhancement, usually approximately 3 to 10 blows.

2.5.6.2 Freeze

Freeze is used to prevent further summing or

stacking of the data on individual channels. This
stops the selected channels from accidently
stacking in unwanted signals after the operator
has decided that the first arrivals of interest can
be easily identified. Freezing is often useful when
working in noisy conditions, where many
hammer impacts are needed to produce a usable
record. Commonly, some traces will have good
first breaks and others will be noisy (random
chance dictates that some channels will be bad).

57
Use Freeze to preserve the good traces, then focus on the noisy weak channels individually or in
small groups. The advantage to freezing the channels with good signals is that they are protected
from degradation during subsequent stacks. Freeze is also used in specialized surveys, such as
when recording "Optimum Window" reflections (where you collect data on only one channel at a
time) and borehole shear wave studies (where you might activate two channels while hitting one
end of a plank, then two others while you hit the other end, then two others while you hit the top).

To try this function, select Freeze from the Do Survey menu on the main menu bar
(alternatively, you can get to the same place by choosing Group/Shot Locations in the
Geometry menu).

The bottom row of entry fields will indicate which channels, if any, are currently frozen.
Position the cursor in the entry field of the channel you would like to freeze and press "2". It
should change from “No” to “Yes”. Press ENTER. The channel numbers on the frozen traces
will be displayed in reverse video. Clear the memory. Notice that the frozen channels remained
on the screen. Hit the ground a few times and observe that the frozen channels do not change
while the unfrozen channels will, growing with each impact.

Unfreeze all the channels and clear the memory with the Clear Memory function.

58
2.5.6.3 Other Display Modes

The visual attributes of traces can be

changed in many ways to optimize the
seismic events of interest. The different
display style options are selectable in the
Trace Style submenu under
Display/Shot Parameters. The most
common display setting is ‘wiggle trace’
to represent the motion of the ground at a
geophone (shown opposite). Wiggle trace
is a good mode for getting an overview of
the record, but less useful than the other
modes for most purposes.

Once seismographs made the transition

from analog to digital instruments, data
were processed on computers.
Interpreters found that if you shaded the positive trace excursions black, it was easier to see
reflections in the record. The StrataVisor NZ and Geode offer this option, called "variable area".
An example is shown in the figure below. Variable area is generally better for reflection surveys,
although no reflections are visible in this record yet.

Variable area turns much of the record solid black, obscuring portions of the individual traces.
This suggests another option, which has
been called "shaded area". In shaded area,
the positive excursions are shaded gray
instead of black, and you can see
individual traces even when they pass
through the shaded portion.(shown
opposite). Choose variable area or
shaded area for reflection surveys,
depending on which works best for an
individual recording.

59
In refraction surveys, the first arrival of the
wave at the geophone is the major event. In
either variable area or wiggle trace,
adjacent traces can swing over and obscure
the first arrivals, especially when the
display gain is increased to sharpen the
first breaks. Clipped display format is a
useful tool when adjacent events obscure
first arrivals.

However, a cautionary note about using

clipped display format is in order.
Although "clipped" is a better form for
picking refraction records, it can obscure
some characteristics of the waveform.
Although it was suggested in the exercise
above, to really see the seismic picture, you need the whole waveform, with background noise,
first arrivals, sound waves, and surface waves displayed. Seeing the whole picture allows you to
predict the location of the desired first arrivals almost exactly, and you should work with normal
wiggle trace first, adjusting the display gain for the best image. Then, you can switch to the
clipped format to eliminate overlap between traces. It will be very helpful to have the data stored
on the hard disk or on the floppy disk, even though you may have a "pickable" paper record in the
field.

Experiment with these options. Hit the ground with the hammer to produce a new record on the
screen. Change the display by switching the Trace Style to each of the other combinations.
Observe the effect on the trace display. Print a copy if desired.

2.5.6.3.1 AGC

Traces shown in this chapter have until now been displayed in "fixed" gain mode, which means
that the display gain scale factor on a particular trace is constant throughout the length of the
record (though the scale factor on individual traces may be different). Notice that each trace
contains a quiet early portion, a large signal as the vibrations pass the geophone, and then often a
quiet portion near the end where the signals weaken. For applications other than refraction
(particularly reflection surveys) you might wish to use a different gain at different times in the
record. The automatic gain control (AGC) performs this function, increasing or decreasing the
display gain to keep the excursions at some reasonable value throughout the record.

The StrataVisor NZ and Geode employ "digital AGC". The average signal in a user defined
section of the trace, called a "window", is used to adjust the display gain (larger or smaller) for
the data sample in the middle of the window time period. Then, the window is advanced slightly
and the adjustment repeated for the next data sample. Digital AGC is able to look ahead in time,
see a large signal coming, turn the display gain down in advance, and properly display large first
arrivals. The record opposite shows a record with AGC applied; the very early portion of the
record looks noisy on the far traces. This is normal, since the AGC increases the display

60
gain until something shows, even if it's only background noise. Then, as the window advances to
include the first arrivals, the gain is decreased in anticipation. The process continues throughout
the record.

The length of the AGC window (in data samples) can be selected by the operator to fit the data
set. For very shallow reflection surveys, with high frequency signals, the window should be
relatively short. For deep reflections, use longer time windows. As a general rule, adopting a
standard number of samples (say 250) will work for most cases, regardless of the sample interval
used. It is usually not advisable to use AGC in refraction surveys.

Turn the AGC on, setting the window length to 250. The appearance of the wave will be quite
different than in the previous experiment. Identification of events in the record now depends on
the character of the wave and comparisons to adjacent traces (rather than on amplitude).

Clear the memory and stack a few

impacts with AGC on. Now
switch to Fixed Gain and readjust
the display gains. Remember that
AGC, like the rest of the display
menu items, has no effect on the
original data stored in memory,
only on how it looks when
displayed and plotted.

AGC is an advanced function,

normally only used for reflection
surveys, and new users should use
fixed gain trace display.

Once familiar with basic data

acquisition and display, the operator should experiment with some enhancements, described in
the following section.

2.5.6.3.2 Use of the Filters

Filters are like the tone controls on a music system. Different frequencies (such as bass and treble
sounds) can be boosted or attenuated to affect the sound. Likewise, the filters in the StrataVisor
NZ and Geode can attenuate low or high frequencies in the seismic record.

The seismic record will contain many different signals: refractions, reflections, surface waves,
vibrations from traffic or wind, and other interference. Most of these are considered "noise" and
are undesirable. Some noise signals are different in frequency than the desired signals, and filters
may be used to improve the visibility of the desired signals. In particular, noise from a source
some distance away tends to be lower in frequency than the desired seismic data (because the
earth carries the low frequency signals for longer distances).

Some signals may be considered noise, even though they are not random. The prime example is
surface waves, which will grow with every hammer blow, but which can obscure useful reflection
arrivals. Surface waves are always lower in frequency than shallow reflections, and you can use a
low-cut filter to reduce them, letting the reflections appear.

61
Another example of non-random noise is 60 Hz (50 Hz in many countries) electrical interference,
often encountered when working in urban areas near power lines. “Notch” filters are provided to
deal with this type of unwanted noise.

Noise from wind may be either high frequencies (from wind blowing on the geophones) or low
frequencies (from wind blowing on trees or buildings, which then push on the ground). Different
types of filters can be used to reduce either type of noise.

The StrataVisor and Geode systems offer two sets of filters: Acquisition and Display. The
acquisition filters are "real-time" digital filters which operate on the incoming data just like
traditional analog filters. When data is acquired with acquisition filters, their effect becomes part
of the record stored in memory.

The display filters, on the other hand, do not affect the numerical value of the data in any way.
Display filters operate on the data after it is stored in memory. The type and corner frequencies
can be changed to examine the effect of different filters on the stored data. When display filters
are used, the filtered data is displayed on the screen and a paper copy can be plotted, but the
original data is held in memory. If the record is saved on a disk, the original, raw data is saved,
not the filtered result. This allows the user to select a different set of filters when the data is
processed or read back into the seismograph for analysis. With the exception of notch filters, it is
generally better to use display rather than acquisition filters to preserve the option for later
changes during analysis.

Low-cut filters are used to remove low-frequency signals (like surface waves, and noise from
distant traffic). Notch filters are used to reject interference from power lines. High-cut filters
attenuate higher frequencies, such as wind noise or nearby machinery. Each filter has a cutoff or
"corner" frequency, which can be selected in the menu. Low-cut filters attenuate frequencies
below the corner frequency, and high-cut filters attenuate frequencies above the corner frequency.
Notch filters attenuate frequencies near their frequency, passing those above or below. Display
filters are available in both 24dB/octave and 48dB/octave attenuation rates.

To experiment with the display filters, select Display Filters in the Shot Parameters menu and
select LOWCUT 15 HZ. You may need to first check the Enable Display Filters checkbox.
Optimize the trace display and print a copy. Repeat the experiment with other, higher frequency,
low-cut filter settings. Compare the records from each filter (including the one made earlier with
no filter) to see the effect of the low-cut filter. If there is noise from a low frequency source, it
should get progressively smaller as higher frequency filters are used. The first arrivals should
grow more distinct, and then later fade away again as you pass into the frequency range where
they are also filtered out. Note that selecting filters with a corner frequency close to the dominant
frequency of the events you are viewing may shift the event in time. For this reason, when doing
refraction surveying, limited filtering is recommended. There may be a range of filter settings
where reflections are visible on the record. The low frequency surface waves should disappear
when higher frequency low-cut filters are used.

The figure below shows a record displayed in variable area with a 24 dB/octave low-cut filter
(and AGC). This is the same survey line used for the previous examples; note that some of the
low-frequency surface waves have been removed and a possible reflection is visible in the data
between 90 and 100 milliseconds on the far traces.

62
Try the same experiment
with the notch filters.
These will be less
dramatic in their effect
on the record and
changes may not be
visible at all unless there
is some power line noise
present. Remember that
ideally they will not
change the character of
the seismic record
(although there is always
some change in the
signal from removing 50
or 60 Hz information).
Since 3-phase power
lines also radiate at three
times the fundamental
frequency, 150 and 180
Hz notch filters are also provided.

Repeating the experiment with the high-cut filters should show some reduction in high
frequencies, particularly at 250 Hz. This may be evidenced by rounding of first breaks or other
effects.

You will need to choose between acquisition and display filters. Acquisition filters have the
disadvantage of permanence, but the advantage of eliminating so-called edge effects at the
beginning and end of the record. In general, when a notch filter is required, it is better to select
one in the acquisition menu.

2.5.6.4 Using Delay

Normally, the seismograph begins recording data instantly when the source triggers. The Delay
function is provided to postpone the start of the record by a selected time. This is applicable to
surveys where there is a substantial distance between the shotpoint and the nearest geophone, and
where there is no usable information in the early part of the record. Examples might be velocity
logging of deep boreholes, or off-end shots in deep refraction surveys.

To test the delay, take a sample record as was done earlier. Save the data using the SAVE
function in the Do Survey menu. Then, in the Acquisition Timing menu, enter a delay of 10 to
20 ms. Repeat the shot with the delay and compare the two records. Notice that the record made
with the delay has not recorded the early portion of the record, but has appended some additional
time to the record. The time lines (and annotated time lines on the plotted record) are
automatically adjusted for the delay values, so times picked on the record are referenced to shot
time.

Delay can also be set to a negative number, which means that the record will display some data
prior to the actual trigger. This is helpful when using an energy source which is difficult to time

63
precisely, such as a weight drop or air gun. One of the seismic channels can be connected to the
trigger signal or to a motion sensor near the source to record the time of impact, or "zero" time.
Routinely using a little negative delay (~10 msec) will help the automatic first break picking
program do a better job.

Set the delay back to –10 msec.

2.5.6.5 Reducing the Number of Acquisition Channels

The number of channels in use may be reduced when not needed. In borehole surveys, it is
common to use only three geophones (or even one). Reducing the number of channels limits the
size of the shot records, so that more records may be stored on a single disk.

To change the number of active channels, clear the data and select Specify Channels in the
Acquisition menu. Move the cursor to the channel you wish to disable and press “4” to make it
inactive. This channel and all of those to the right of it will no longer be visible on the display
and will not record data until reactivated. The channels are not renumbered when some of the
channels are turned off.

64
2.5.7 Storing Data
If you have used a seismograph before, you may have used an older device that produced a paper
plot which you took home, picked the arrivals, analyzed, and interpreted. If that is the case, you
know that records which looked fine in the field can suddenly develop poor first arrivals when
examined in the office. Perhaps even the location was uncertain. The StrataVisor NZ and
Geode will save the digital records on a disk. Once saved, they can be read back into memory,
or read, displayed, and interpreted on a personal computer. This can be extremely useful, even for
ordinary refraction surveys, since the records plotted in the field are rarely optimum and often
difficult to pick. Plotting the records again in the office, and picking them from the screen or an
optimized paper plot is a great improvement. Automatic refraction analysis on the computer is an
even greater benefit. Digital recording and processing are required for reflection surveys.

When recording data, it is generally advisable to save the data to the internal hard disk or an
external tape driveMGOS (if you have a tape installed). To allow storage of your data, you must
enable either Save to Disk and/or Save to Tape in the File/Storage Parameters. If saving to disk,
indicate a path or folder. This is the folder your data will be stored in. See Chapter 4 (File
Storage and Handling) for a discussion of tape drives and other storage media.

Data may be transferred from the hard disk to 3.5" floppy via the internal floppy drive. Currently
you must use standard WindowsTM file copying and transfer procedures.

At this point, you should know how to acquire data, save it on disk, and read the data back. You
should also be quite familiar with the use of the system menus.

2.5.8 Answers
The Answers menu is used to analyze the seismic data. Programs are provided to allow a fairly
complete seismic refraction solution, including layer depths and velocities which may be
interpreted into geologic structure.

A proper seismic refraction interpretation requires at least two records, each record acquired with
the source at opposite ends of the line. More detail, and deeper information, can be obtained by
also locating the source well off either end of the line and in the interior. For each shot, the Pick
Breaks function will assist in picking the first breaks and saving the data on disk. Be sure that the
line geometry is properly entered for each shotpoint. To help you remember, the StrataVisor
NZ and Geodewill prompt you for geometry data at appropriate intervals if you are in the
refraction mode. Geometrics recommends taking 5 to 7 shots per geophone spread to reduce
possibilities for error and to best characterize the subsurface. However, this may not be
necessary for surveys for characterizing larger features, like the weathering layer for petroleum
surveys or ripability surveys to determine rock velocities.

2.5.8.1 SIPQC

SIPQC is an interactive refraction interpretation program. It was originally developed by Jim

Scott at the United States Geological Survey and has been commercialized under his company
RimRock Geophysics. The software is now embedded in the StrataVisor NZ and Geode
SGOS and MGOS operating software.

65
SIPQC uses first break pick files to generate a velocity cross section of the area under your
seismic survey. It will calculate a depth at each geophone if the data is of sufficient quality and
density, otherwise it will estimate depth under each shot point. Up to 7 shots can be used in the
analysis. In the following exercise, we will use the data included on the data disks sent with your
system. Take a minute to install the data as described in Appendix C.

First, all of the data files must have their first arrivals picked. If you have not already done this
with the sample data, take a moment to do this.

66
2.5.8.1.1 Selecting First Break Pick Files

Next, select Answers from the DoSurvey menu and choose

Solve Refraction Using SIPQC.

Choose the menu that contains the sample

refraction data and choose 5 of the data files.
You will be asked to give your spread a name
that will help you track your interpretation.

The adjacent Time-Distance

graph shows all of the first
break picks from each of your
shot records. Each pick has
been replaced with a number
indicating the layer that the
seismograph program estimates
the energy has penetrated to.
Picks from the same shot point
are joined by a straight line.

67
2.5.8.1.2 Layer Assignments

The seismic program is not perfect at assigning layering and will often require editing to ensure
that the interpretation program will operate properly.
However, this can be accomplished by following a few
simple rules.

The point at which a series of picks changes from one

layer to another is known as a hinge point (arrow,
shown opposite). Hinge points are generally identified
when there is a reduction in the slope of the line of
picks.

However, changes in slope can also be caused by

irregular refractor topography. To check that this is not
the case, you must compare the line of picks at the same
location with another shot from the same side of the
spread, but arriving later in time.

The figure opposite

shows such a
comparison. The lower
shot (outlined in light
grey) shows a potential
hinge point at the 4th
geophone. The shot
above (outlined in dark
grey) shows NO
equivalent hinge point.
This means that the
hinge point on the first
red t-d plot is valid and
the numbers should
progress from layer 1 to
layer 2.

Proceed by assigning layers to the t-d plot for each shot.

This may take some practice and you should consult
other books on refraction surveying to review the layer
assignment process. Below, a figure is shown with all
layers assigned for a two layer interpretation.

68
2.5.8.1.3 Running the Interpretation

Once you are satisfied with the layer assignment, you

can run the interpretation by pressing Continue.
Depending on the speed of your computer, this may
take a few seconds. A display similar to the one
opposite will appear, showing a boundary between the
assigned layers. Any suspect first break picks will
show as question marks on the plot. Refer to the
SIPQC manual for additional explanation of the
emergent ray points.

To see a color version of the display

with the calculated velocities, press
Toggle Plot. The following display
will be shown.

You can return to the layer

assignment plot by pressing Back to try other layer assignments reflecting other interpretations.

There may be other interpretation tools under the answers menu. Currently, we are offering for
trial a version of Optim’s refraction interpretation package that requires no layer assignment and
is more automated than the interpretation package discussed above. Please refer to the Optim
documentation for more details.

69
2.6 Summary

By now, you should appreciate that the StrataVisor™ NZ and Geode™ are extremely powerful
and easy-to-use seismographs. Only a portion of the features have been discussed, and you should
continue your familiarization by reading the rest of this manual and conducting further field
experiments

As a general rule, the seismograph is very forgiving, and will gather the highest quality data
possible with a minimum of effort in the field. While we have concentrated on refraction, the
StrataVisor™ NZ and Geode™ were designed for shallow and deep reflection, and are capable
of both shallow and deep reflection, cross-well tomography, surface wave and VSP surveys.
Geometrics can offer advice, short courses, and application notes to assist you.

Don’t forget that many of the functions discussed in Chapters 1 and 2 are accessible as HOT
KEYS, which reduces the number of key strokes and speeds operations. See a listing of the HOT
KEYS under the DO_SURVEY menu.

70
 3 Software and Interactive Menus
3.1 Introduction

This section describes the software used to operate the ES-3000, the Geode and StrataVisor NZ
and NZC. It includes detailed descriptions of the display, keypad, and interactive menus. The
menu section is organized in a glossary style so that individual sections may be used alone to
explain menu items in detail.

There are four configurations available for data acquisition: ESOS (ES-3000 only), Single Geode
Operating Software (SGOS), Multiple Geode Operating Software (MGOS) and Marine Multiple
Geode Operating Software (MMGOS) useful for marine, tomography and VSP surveys where
high cycle times are important.

ESOS/SGOS software runs on laptop computers and has functions necessary for the collection,
processing and interpretation of engineering-style geophysical surveys. SGOS can control from 3
to 24 channels in a single box.

ESOS on SGOS on Laptop MGOS on Laptop NZ/C (comes standard Comments

Laptop with ES- with Geode with Geodes with MGOS)
3000
No. of Channels 8 and 12 3 to 24 3 to > 500 3 to > 240 Number of channels limited
Per Line only by practical data size

No. of Geodes 1 1 Many Many

No. of Lines 1 1 Typically 2 Up to 4 MGOS operates up to 16 lines
on desktop computer

Sample Intervals 64µs to 2ms 20µs to 16ms 20µs to 16ms 20µs to 16ms
Record Length 4K 16K 16-64K 16-64K
Geophone Testing No No Yes Yes

Analog Testing Not available Not available Available as built in or Available as built in or Future
external external

Data Formats SEG2 SEG2 SEG2/Y/D SEG2/Y/D

OS Win98/NT/2K/XP Win98/NT/2K/XP Win98/NT/2K/XP Win98/NT/2K/XP 95 version available on web
site
Data Storage Locally on OS Locally on OS Writes to DAT, DLT, Writes to DAT, DLT,
structured media structured media 3480, 3490 etc 3480, 3490 etc

Hardware Correlator No Yes Yes

Bandwidth See sample 1.7 Hz to 20 kHz 1.7 Hz to 20 kHz. 1.7 Hz to 20 kHz. Lower
rates Lower corner available corner available
Repeater No No Yes Yes

Preamp Gain 24 and 36 dB 24 and 36 dB 12/24 dB or 24/36 dB 12/24 db or 24/36 db or gains are software selectable,
software software or 0 dB 0 db gain pairs are jumper
selectable selectable selectable
Roll Capability No No Yes Yes
Real-Time Spectral No No Yes Yes
Display

71
MGOS software runs either on a laptop computer, or comes standard on the
StrataVisor NZ/C seismograph. It contains all of the functions found in SGOS, as well
as all of the additional data management protocol required for larger scale surveys
with large numbers of channels or large numbers of Geode modules. The following
table summarizes the differences between the two software packages.

This manual describes all configurations of software simultaneously, as ESOS and SGOS are
subsets of MGOS. Marine MGOS (MMGOS) has additional features. Sections of the manual that
describe features that are exclusive to MGOS will be shown with MGOS as a superscript in the
section heading, shown as follows:

2.x.x This is a section describing an MGOS feature MGOS

Features that are specific to Marine MGOS have the superscript MARINE . In addition, there are
several additional options that can be purchased separately. These features are designated in the
manual with an OPTIONAL superscript. This list of options is ever- expanding, so please contact the
factory or check our web site for the latest updates.

3.2 Installing the software on your system

Please refer to Appendix B.

3.3 Running SGOS or MGOS Software for the First Time

Please refer to Section 2.

72
3.4 Accessing the Menu Structure Using the Front Panel
Keypad on the StrataVisor NZ.

3.4.1 Color Screen

The keypad on the NZ system has 21 keys, including numbers 0 through 9, MENU, ENTER
(shown as a return arrow ↵), Func, CLR (clear), "-" (hyphen or minus), "." (decimal point),
“TAB”, and 4 arrow keys. Every effort has been made to render the operating software fully
operational from the keypad, precluding the need for a mouse. Still, as the WindowsTM operating
system was designed around the mouse, you might find it useful to have one handy for special
operations such as customizing your display, as well as operations outside the StrataVisorTM
acquisition software. It is assumed that the reader is reasonably versed in operating WindowsTM -
based programs.

3.4.2 Functions of the Keys

The MENU key is used to select the operating menu. Pressing this key automatically takes you to
the DoSurvey menu, since this is the menu most often used while surveying.

The arrow keys are used to position the cursor among menu options on the screen. The left arrow
key can also be used as a backspace to delete the last digit when entering a string of numbers.

CLR is used to back out of the menu or to recover from errors.

ENTER or "↵" is used to confirm a selection after positioning the cursor or after keying in a
number.

"−" is used to designate a negative number or to designate a range of numbers, i.e. 1-12 (for
numbers 1 through 12).

"." (decimal point or period) is used to insert a decimal point or to act as a left mouse click to fill in
check boxes.

The TAB key moves control from entry field to entry field. It works slightly differently than the
arrow keys. The best way to understand the functions of these and the rest of the keys is to practice.
You will become fluent with their operation in a short time.

The Func key enables access to the menu quick keys that precede each menu item on the main
menu. For example, pressing Func then 2 accesses the Geometry menu.

3.4.2.1 Hot Keys

Hot keys provide single keystroke access to many of the important functions in the SGOS and
MGOS menu structure. They are an easy and powerful way to navigate complicated software.
There are two kinds of hot keys in the M/SGOS operating systems

73
 • Global, which work no matter what window is open or active
• Local, which pertain to a particular window being ‘selected’.

3.4.2.1.1 Global Hot Keys

The following table lists all global hot keys. Note that some keys are slightly different on the
StrataVisor NZ seismograph since its weatherproof keyboard is more limited.

Function Geode NZ
Arm/disarm 1 1
Clear data with warning 2 2
dialog box to clear data with
default button set to yes
Activate geometry Dialog 3 3
Box
Maximize noise monitor 4 4
window
Maximize shot record 5 5
window
Autoscale traces 6 6
Save data 7 7
Print shot record 8 8
Correlate 9 9
Restore windows 0 0
Toggle active window TAB TAB
Roll right Ctrl-End FUNC →
Roll left Ctrl-Home FUNC ←
Manual trigger t

Most global hot keys activate menu items in

the DO_SURVEY menu. The DO_SURVEY
menu is shown opposite which controls the
majority of the operation of a seismograph
once it is set up. The seismograph can be
ARMED or DIARMED using the 1 and 0
keys from the keypad or keyboard. You can
quickly maximize the noise window with hot
key 4, autoscale traces with hot key 6 or print
a record with hot key 8.

74
3.4.2.1.2 Local Hot Keys – Shot Window Selected

When the shot window is selected, the following keys are active. Particularly handy are the
increase/decrease trace size option and the increase/decrease time scale.

Function Geode NZ
Scroll ↑↓ ↑↓
Increase/decrease time PAGE Up/Down FCN ↑↓
scale
Increase/decrease trace → →
size (all) when in fix gain
Otherwise gain style
Increase/decrease trace ← ←
size (individual)
when in fix gain
Otherwise gain style
Toggle trace clipping “-“ “-“

3.4.2.1.3 Local Hot Keys - Noise Window Active

Function Geode/ ES-3000 NZ

Increase/decrease pilot → →
sensitivity ← ←
Increase/decrease ↑↓ ↑↓
sensitivity

3.4.2.1.4 Local Hot Keys - Pick Window Active

Function Geode/ ES-3000 NZ

Print picked traces 8 8

3.4.2.1.5 Local Hot Keys – Log Window Active

Function Geode/ ES-3000 NZ
Scroll up or down ↑↓ ↑↓
Page up or down PAGE Up/Down FCN ↑↓

3.4.3 External Keyboard and Laptop Keyboard

Your seismograph may also be operated from an external computer-style keyboard with a PS-2
connector. Just plug the keyboard into the connector provided (some keyboards may require being
plugged in during boot-up). With an alphanumeric keyboard, folders, project names, and other

75
parameters may be named with letters as well as numbers. However, it is recommended that shot
record file names be numerical, as this is what most processing software will be expecting.

3.4.3.1 Using Keyboard Short Cuts to Get Around Menus

Some form of pointing device is the preferred way of operating a Windows based operating
system. However, this is often not practical in the field as there are seldom flat surfaces to steady
the hand. Instead, you may find it more appropriate to navigate to items in the menus using the
ALT key on the keyboard and the letter or number associated with each menu. The key to be
pressed in conjunction with the ALT key is always underlined and is either IN the name of the
menu, or in front of the menu selection.

For example, you can quickly get to the Display Boundary options in the display window by
pressing ALT 6, followed by 1 then 1 again.

Attempting this sequence in the field with a mouse or with a touch pad can be frustrating without a
steady surface. Keyboard short cuts are much quicker.

76
3.5 Detailed Description of Menus

There are four separate windows that can be displayed at any given time for MGOS software. The
spectral window is absent in SGOS software. Like any WindowsTM -based program, these windows
can be positioned and sized at will, and your settings will be remembered from session to session.
If you have an NZ based portable system, you will need to plug in a mouse to accomplish this, but
once it is done you should not need a mouse in the field. The system is designed to be fully
operational with the built-in keypad.

On initial power-up of your software, you should see the following:

You may or may not see the Geometry GUI, a window which gives you a graphical representation
of the ES-3000/Geodes on the line. The Geometry GUI is described separately in section 3.8.

77
Users of SGOS software will see windows: the shot, the noise display, the log file and the geometry
GUI. The spectral window will be missing.

Across the top you will see the list of main operational menus. Within each are a selection of
submenus. Before we get in to the description of these, we will first discuss each of the four main
display windows.

78
3.5.1 Survey Log Window
To view the survey log, press MENU to highlight the menu bar, then choose Window and Log
Display. This will maximize the survey log:

The survey log keeps track of everything that happens during the course of a survey. Initially it
displays the basic settings of the StrataVisorTM, such as beginning line number, stack mode, sample
interval, etc. (we will not dwell on these individual items now; that will come later with the in-depth
discussion of the menus). Once data acquisition begins, the survey log will keep track of shot
numbers, shot times, output devices, errors, and further parameter changes. The survey log
functions as a complete accounting of the seismic survey.

3.5.2 Noise Display Window

Next, go to the Window menu and choose Noise Display:

This is a real-time display of the signal coming in on each channel. It is useful for troubleshooting
the geophone spread, analyzing and documenting ambient noise conditions, and for determining the
best time to take a record. The sensitivity is displayed in the upper left-hand corner and can be
controlled by using the up and down arrow keys on the keypad after the window has been selected
(you can tell if the window is active by looking at the top bar – it should be a different color than the

79
other window bars. Set the sensitivity to 0.05 mVolts and lightly touch one of the geophone
connectors to get a feel for the function of the noise monitor.

3.5.3 Shot Record Display Window

The Shot window can be maximized from the Window menu. Since you have collected no data,
the bulk of this window will be blank. Take a noise record by choosing Manual Trigger in the
System menu. This will cause the system to take a record and display the results:

Your display may look somewhat

different depending on your
display parameter settings, but at a
minimum you should see a series
of straight or wiggly lines similar
to those shown above. Each
wiggly line or trace corresponds
to a channel in the seismograph.
In a real survey, each channel will
correspond to a geophone on the
ground and will represent the
ground motion at that location.

There are three lines of

information across the top of the
display. The top rows are reserved
for message lines showing the
acquisition parameters, system status, the channel numbers, and trace amplitudes. The remaining
area is reserved for displaying the seismic data. Time increases downwards, and horizontal timing
lines are labeled in seconds. As we will see later, the time window and channels displayed are user-
selectable. The first line of the header contains the following information (xx.xx will be some
numerical value depending on the parameters selected):

80
SI xxxx is the sample interval in milliseconds.

RL xxxx is the record length seconds. The StrataVisor allows the use of all or part of the
available memory, so the record duration will depend on the combination of sample rate and record
length.

DELAY xxxx is the delay in the start of the record (in milliseconds) after the trigger signal, or if
negative, the amount of data prior to the trigger signal.

AF indicates that acquisition filters are enabled.

DF indicates that display filters are enabled.

STACK xxxx indicates how many stacks are currently in memory.

AGC or FIXED will indicate the gain style setting (no indication of gain style indicates that it is set
to NORMAL).

A message indicating the status or type of data will be displayed in the upper right hand corner of
the screen:

MEMORY CLEAR indicates the memory has been cleared – no data, and the stack count should
be zero.

UNSAVED STACKED DATA is seismic data stacked into the memory (but not saved on disk).

SAVED AS xxxx.DAT indicates the stacked data has been saved on disk (in file XXXX.DAT).

READ FROM xxxx.DAT indicates data read from disk (from file xxxx.DAT).

The remaining two lines in the display header show the channel numbers and the relative trace sizes
or display gains. Relative trace amplitudes are labeled in dB. Amplitudes are accurately displayed,
so that absolute amplitude comparisons can be made when the traces are displayed in fixed gain (as
opposed to AGC, or automatic gain control).

In systems with 48 or more channels, there may not be enough room to label every channel. In that
case, we label as many as feasible.

3.5.4 Spectral Window MGOS

The spectral window shown line spectra of each trace defined in the display window. Note that the
spectral window is a MAJOR user of CPU time. This window should be closed when operations
requiring the controller CPU are more critical.

81
3.5.5 Gather Windows MARINE
The gather window is used in marine surveys to look at a single trace from each shot gather. The
operator can select which trace should be plotted in the DISPLAY>Gather Parameters menu. Up to
3 gather windows can be displayed simultaneously.

3.5.6 Trigger Timing Window with Gun Energy Monitor MARINE

The trigger timing window is used in a marine survey to watch for variations in the shot cycle time
or missed shots, indicative of problems with the navigation system or a measure of system
overloading. This is a combined bar graph display, with the upgoing (positive) bars showing the
time between successive shots, and the downgoing (negative) showing the cumulative energy in a
single trace. For the gun energy monitor, typically a hydrophone is placed near the gun, or
sometimes the nearest hydrophone is used.

Warning thresholds can be set for either the shot timing and gun energy histograms. When
thresholds are exceeded, the traces turn a different color, as shown in the window below. Display
parameters can be set in the DISPLAY>Trigger Parameters dialog box.

82
3.5.7 Noise Window MARINE
The Noise Window bar graph provides a ‘snapshot’ of the noise at any user defined moment in the
acquisition cycle, typically at the very beginning of the record or at the very end. A display
threshold can be set, above which a noisy trace will turn red. The noise window bar graph is often a
requirement on client-monitored surveys. Noise monitor display parameters can be changed in the
DISPLAY>Noise Parameters dialog box.

3.5.8 Geometry Graphical User Interface

The Geometry GUI provides a graphical representation of your survey, along with a wide range
of control capability. It is particularly useful when conducting reflection surveys, but can be
useful in a wide range of applications. It summarizes, in one simple view, the physical positions
and other attributes of the hardware on the ground, and allows graphical control of these.

The Geometry GUI (GGUI) operations are extensive and are described in section 3.8.

83
3.6 Status Bars

3.6.1 Main Menu Bar

The main menu bar has been organized to follow the convention suggested and approved by
many of our users over the years. Owners of previous Geometrics instruments such as the
StrataVisor R and RX, the SmartSeis and the ES-2401 will recognize the left to right convention
for setup and operation.

The main menu selections are displayed at the top of the screen:

When the MENU key is pressed on the StrataVisor NZ, the Do Survey menu will drop down and a
secondary menu showing the corresponding choices appears. If you are using a laptop or computer,
you can use your pointing device to highlight the menu items or use the ALT key in combination
with any of the preceding numbers in the selections in the main menu. For example ALT- 7 pulls
down the Do-Survey menu, similar to pushing the MENU key on the StrataVisor.

The secondary menu items have numbers in front of them. You can select an item by pressing the
corresponding number key instead of moving the cursor. Pressing the number key to select a menu
item will be much faster when conducting actual surveys, especially after the operator has learned
the numbers.

In addition, some selections have "hot keys" that allow them to be selected without actually entering
the menu. Any selection with a number to the right is hot-key enabled. For instance, you may arm
the system from outside the menu system by simply pressing 1 (see the DoSurvey menu).

Survey menus are used for setting up and naming a new survey.

Geometry menus are used to record the locations of the geophones and the energy source.

Observer menus are used to set up the survey log and update the line and shot record number.

Acquisition menus control the data gathering parameters (such as sample interval, record length,
filters).

File menus control the saving/reading of data files to/from disk.

Display menus control the way the data is displayed on the screen and plotted.

DoSurvey contains the functions normally used to acquire, display, and analyze data in a
production mode.

Window menus are used to maximize and minimize individual display windows.

Answers menus are used to run the field quality control software programs to analyze the data.

84
Print menus control printing related parameters.

System menus are used for general operating and test functions.

Experiment with the system. The complete menu structure is listed on the following pages. Many
secondary menus have a status indication, which identifies the current setting.

The current settings in the following examples are representative. The actual menus will display
many other alternatives.

3.6.2 Bottom Status Bar

Across the bottom of the SCS window, there is a status bar shown with important information
regarding the mode that the software and hardware may currently be in.

The leftmost box displays the system status, an important part of the survey. Possible status
messages include:
Status Description
Armed Ready to acquire data
Disarmed Data acquisition disabled
Acquire Collecting data on A/D cards
Busy Undertaking system management
Sending data Transferring data from A/D cards to computer
Receiving Pilot Getting pilot from pilot channel
Sendintg Pilot Transferring pilot to A/D cards to use correlator
Processing Data Undertaking correlation or other signal processing

The next box indicates whether sampling is underway on the A/D cards.

The 3rd box indicates the display mode for the shot window.

The 4th box displays the stack count.

The 5th box displays the status of the data, which can include:

Memory Clear
Unsaved Stacked Data
Saved as file xxx.dat (Stacked Data)
Saved as file xxx.dat (Correlated Data)

The 6th box displays the current location of the shot.

85
3.7 Interactive Menus

3.7.1 Survey
3.7.1.1 New Survey

The Survey menu is used to provide a name for the survey, an initial line number, and if
writing to tape, an initial tape label MGOS. It is recommended that numbers be used for the
line number and tape labels.

The Survey Name will be the file name for the survey log. This log is displayed in the
Survey Log window, and will be saved in standard ASCII format. It may be printed off
line with any text editor, such as Wordpad, and can be archived along with the seismic
data.

The Initial Line Number is useful if you intend to include numerous geophone spreads into
one “survey”. In this case, you would update the line number (see the Observer menu)
each time you picked up and moved the spread. If you intend to begin a new “survey”
with each new geophone spread, the line number may or may not be useful, depending on
how you choose to do your bookkeeping.

If writing to tape, the Initial Tape NumberMGOS is a useful parameter in that the survey log
will indicate the tape number that each file is written to. When the tape is full and the
operator inserts a new tape, the tape label number will automatically increment. It is good
practice to label each tape with the appropriate tape number. By referring to the survey log,
locating specific shot records will be greatly simplified.

86
3.7.2 Geometry
Geometry is a collection of menus used to annotate the seismic data with the locations of the
geophones and seismic source. The SEG-2 standard provides space in the header for 3-dimensional
coordinates (X, Y, and Z) for the energy source and each geophone group.

The information in the Geometry menu is optional, and surveys may be conducted without
reference to this menu. However, its use is highly recommended as this information is essential
when using the Answers functions. Some third-party interpretation packages also use this
information.

This information will be attached to the data when the file is saved to disk. If a file is read from
disk, the coordinates displayed in the following menus will be from the data read in. The
information read from the disk file can be printed on the paper records. Proper use of these
capabilities will label each file with the geophone geometry and source location.

3.7.2.1 Survey Mode

When you are in Refraction Mode, the

seismic software treats some of the data
scaling operations differently. Autoscaling
operations are done based on the amplitude of
the noise before the first breaks to minimize
the amount of manual scaling that may be
necessary

Reflection Mode trace autoscaling is done by

normalizing each trace to the maximum value of the trace shown on the display. If Refraction
Mode is selected, Gap will be grayed out).

3.7.2.2 Group Interval

The Group Interval is the distance between geophones or

groups of geophones. Units are set in the System menu. If
you are working in stations (i.e., one station equals x feet or

87
meters), then the units you set are irrelevant. Be aware, however, that the functions in the Answers
menu require units of feet or meters to accurately perform calculations of depth or velocity. If you
intend to use these functions, you must base your coordinates
in one of these two units.

3.7.2.3 Group/Shot Locations

This dialog box allows you to assign physical

locations of the geophones to the channel numbers and
to the shot position. The title bar of the dialog box
indicates whether the coordinates displayed refer to
either

• The next file to be written

• A file that was read in from a mass storage
device

The geometry that you choose will also affect the coordinates displayed in the Geometry GUI,
described in section 3.8.

3.7.2.3.1 Navigation in the Geometry Dialog Box

Several keys are used for navigation within the five categories of information accessible in the
menu – shot coordinate, geophone interval, geophone coordinate, use and freeze:

• The TAB key and up/down arrow keys are used to navigate from category to category.
• When in the Shot Coordinate box, the left and right arrow keys are used to increment
or decrement the shot coordinate by the default group interval.
• In any other box, the left/right arrow keys are used to navigate to the next or preceding
entry within a category.

88
Regardless of the number of channels, only the positions of six channels are displayed at a time. To
view a different segment of the geophone spread, simply tab or use the arrow keys to move to the
right (or if using a mouse, use the scroll bar). You will see the channel numbers change
accordingly.

3.7.2.3.2 Entering new values in the geometry fields

You can type a new coordinate into the Shot, Interval or Geophone Coordinate categories. A new
value is ‘accepted’ in each of these categories by pressing the TAB, UP/DOWN arrow keys or
ENTER key. Special care should be exercised when entering data in the Shot Coordinate box as
accidentally pressing the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys will increment or decrement the shot value,
probably to an unwanted value. If you make a mistake typing an entry in any box, you can simply
move to another category and return to the box that you wish to revise. The entire number will be
highlighted, indicating that it will be replaced with the new value that you type in.

3.7.2.3.3 Shot Coordinate

If you know the coordinate of your shot, you may enter it next to Shot Location. The shot point
location can also be set by positioning the cursor over the shot point location field and using the left
and right arrow keys. The shot will be moved in increments equal to the group interval. This is
useful in that it doesn’t require the actual coordinate of the shot to be known, just its location with
respect to the geophones. You may know you want the shot between geophones 5 and 6, but you
may not know the actual coordinates of that position. Move the cursor as close to that position as
possible, and then fine-tune it based on the positions shown for the relevant geophones.

89
3.7.2.3.4 Geophone (Group) Interval

When you first define a survey, the interval between geophones (group) is set to whatever number
was entered in the Interval dialog box discussed above. However, you now have the flexibility to
edit individual group intervals – this need not be constant throughout the spread. These values will
be retained until they are globally reset in the Interval dialog box.

3.7.2.3.5 Geophone Coordinates

Physical coordinates for each seismograph channel are assigned in the Geophone Coordinate
boxes. You will notice that that as you enter new geophone coordinates, the values before and after
the coordinate that you enter will be recalculated using the geophone interval set in the line above.
This ‘rippling’ effect allows rapid repositioning of the line based on the less variable group interval,
rather than having to type a new location at every geophone location. If you are entering a
complicated geometry that has missed locations and non-equal phone intervals, you will probably
want to set the interval values first before assigning coordinates.

3.7.2.3.6 Channel Use

Channels can be designated as DATA, AUX, PILOT or INACTIVE. Note that any assignment
of a channel use ripples to the right only, to facilitate setting many channels the same.

DATA channels are standard acquisition channels used for recording data. They have an
associated coordinate and geophone interval. DATA and INACTIVE channels are used to define
the limits of the active spread in preparation for rolling a subset of contiguous channels either
forward or backwards through the total number of channels available in the system. When
channels ‘roll’, they take on the attributes of an neighboring channel (either DATA OR
INACTIVE). See the section on ROLLING under DO_SURVEY for more description).

AUX channels are used for recording ancillary data during a survey. This may include shot
timing, uphole data, vibrator information or any other time series. Regretably, AUX channels also
currently have an associated position, which must be accounted for when you have AUX
channels in the middle of the spread (see note below).

AUX channels do not roll (see section on ROLLING CHANNELS). Once an AUX, always an
AUX, and it is unaffected by the rolling process.

Note regarding AUX coordinates: Whenever possible, AUX channels should be

connected at the end (preferable) or beginning of the geophone spread. This simplifies
the assignment of geometry since AUX channels have an associated geometry. However,
occasionally it is necessary for the AUX channels to be in the middle of the spread,
particularly when using a two line Geode system with only two network cards in the
controlling PC. To avoid the AUX channels occupying a coordinate location that should
be used for a geophone, the interval between the AUX channel and the previous channel
should be set to 0.0.

There may be some situations in which it is useful to assign an AUX channel with a
coordinate. A bad geophone could be marked as an AUX to distinguish it from its

90
 neighbors so it can be identified by the processing software. If parts of a geophone
spread cable are unused, they could be marked as AUX along with a 0 coordinate
interval to distinguish them from their neighbors. These channels can also be FROZEN
(see below) so they will not collect data, and are easier to identify by subsequent
processing

The PILOT channel is used to record data from a vibratory source to be used in the correlation
process. There can be only one pilot channel. The pilot channel does not roll.

INACTIVE channels do not collect data. Inactive channels hold a coordinate position and a group
interval, and can assume the attributes of adjacent channels when rolling.

FREEZE function stops data collection on a channel. This feature is useful in refraction surveys
once the first break is clearly identifiable on channels near to the shot, but additional stacks are
required on far offsets. Similarly, FREEZE is useful to eliminate data altogether on channels that
have bad geophones or bad data. The FREEZE function does not ROLL when the ROLL RIGHT or
ROLL LEFT function is applied (See description under DO_SURVEY menu).

3.7.2.3.7 Setting up a simple active spread in preparation for ROLLING

If you are undertaking a

reflection survey, you may want
to set a group of channels to
ROLL through the total number
of available channels. In the
example opposite, channels 2 to
4 have been set as DATA
channels and channels 1, 5 and 6
have been set as inactive
channels. If the operator ROLLS
RIGHT , channel 2 will be made INACTIVE and channel 5 will be changed to a DATA channel.
Remember that PILOT, AUX and FREEZE channels do not roll. The ROLL function is usually
performed with the SHOT INCREMENT and CHANNEL AUTO ROLL functions set to permit
hands-off operation.

3.7.2.4 Phone Increment

3.7.2.4.1 Phone Increment: Reflection

Surveys Using Mechanical Roll
Switch

The Phone Increment is typically used in CDP-style

reflection surveys and updates the physical coordinates
of the active geophone spread when using an external
roll switch. A mechanical roll switch physically
changes the connections between the geophones and
the channels of the seismograph. The roll switch

91
allows a contiguous subset of active geophones to maintain a fixed distance to the shot as it moves
over the area of the seismic survey.

For instance, when conducting a common-depth-point (CDP) reflection survey, normal procedure is
to lay out a spread of geophones, connected to the seismograph through the roll switch. The
number of geophones on the ground is larger than the number of channels in the seismograph, and
the roll box controls which geophones are active (i.e., connected to the seismograph) at any given
time. After each shot, the source and active segment of the geophone spread are incremented
forward or “moved up”. No geophones or cables are actually moved physically, but the geophones
that are now connected to the seismograph are different than before. Example: when the first shot is
recorded, ground stations 1 through 24 (out of a total of, say, 48) are connected to channels 1-24 on
the [24-channel] seismograph. Then, the shot is moved up (generally by a distance equal to the
group interval), and the active portion of the spread is also moved up using the roll switch. For the
second shot, ground stations 2 through 25 are now connected to channels 1-24 on the seismograph.
For the third shot, you are recording from ground stations 3 through 26, and so on.

Setting the shot and geophone increment appropriately will allow the seismograph to keep track of
shot and geophone coordinates automatically, precluding the need for the operator to update this
data after each shot. This is very useful, particularly in production seismic surveying.

In practice, any sequence will be interrupted eventually. In that case, just enter the correct values for
the line geometry before saving the file. If the geometry changes (different group interval for
example), just update the information.

3.7.2.4.2 Phone Increment: Reflection Surveys Using Built In Software Roll

The Phone Increment is usually set to zero for reflection surveys that employ the MGOS
internal roll function (see DO_SURVEY menu). The rolling process, which changes channels on
the trailing edge to INACTIVE and changes channels at the leading edge the of the spread to
DATA, facilitates incrementing of the geophone coordinates.

3.7.2.4.3 Phone Increment for Refraction Surveys

For most refraction work, you should set the phone increment to zero.

3.7.2.5 Shot Increment

Shot Increment is added to the current Shot
Coordinate after data are saved. See above discussion
on Geophone Increment. The shot increment is
typically non-zero for surveys involving either an
external roll switch or the internal software function.

92
 Type of Survey Shot Increment Phone Increment
Refraction Adjusted manually Usually 0
Downhole Typically zero Usually non-zero
Reflection (External Roll Box) Automatically Usually non-zero
incremented after each
save
Reflection (Internal Roll Function) Automatically Usually zero
incremented after each
save

For most refraction work, you should set the shot increment to zero.

3.7.2.6 Gap

Not currently implemented in the software. To be

completed at a later date.

3.7.2.7 Automatically Rolling

Channels

When data are saved, you can elect to have the group of active channels automatically ROLLED
forwards or backwards. In combination with the
SHOT INCREMENT, this completely automates
the ROLLING function so the operator may
concentrate on the observer’s log and notes.

To turn on automatic rolling, check either the

Enable Auto Roll Up/Right on save radio
button, or the Auto Roll Down/Left on save
radio button. You can also enter the number of
channels (geophones) that the system will roll in the Geophone Roll Increment field.

93
3.7.3 Observer
The Observer menu allows you to enter basic information about the survey: who the client is, the
job #, site name, etc. This is also where you update the line number if you start a new "line"
within a survey.

3.7.3.1 Edit Survey Description

Use the Edit Survey Description utility to input job-specific information. This is completely
customizable, and there is no limit to the amount of information you may enter here. You will
likely create your own company template, which will be automatically remembered from session to
session. The information entered here will be located at the beginning of the survey log.
Obviously, you need an external keyboard to take full advantage of this feature.

3.7.3.2 New Line Number

Depending how you conduct your survey and do

your bookkeeping, you may prefer to break your
survey out in terms of "lines". For instance, you
may open a survey, and that survey may consist of
several parallel refraction lines. They may be end-
to-end or side-by-side. How you define the terms

94
"survey" and "line" is entirely up to you. A survey may consist of one line or a group of lines. A
line may consist of one or several end-to-end geophone spreads. In any case, changing the line
number in the middle of the survey simply updates the Survey Log. The data itself is not
effected. If you elect to change the line number, you will also be given the opportunity to update
the file number if you wish. However, changing the line number does not affect your data
storage parameters -- the data will still go to the same directory or folder. Consequently, if you
update the file name within the same survey, you must take care to provide a unique file name.
The StrataVisor will not allow existing files to be overwritten -- you will be warned in this
eventuality.

95
3.7.4 Acquisition
This set of menus contains the acquisition parameters, those variables which affect how the data is
collected.

If newly acquired data is in the memory, the system will not allow you to change most of these
parameters until you erase the data from memory, because stacking records with different
acquisition parameters is illogical. For example, there is no logic in changing the sample rate
between stacks. Attempting to change these parameters without clearing memory will result in a
prompt to either save the data first or clear the memory.

Acquisition parameters are permanent in their effect on the data (unlike display parameters). You
cannot change the sample interval, record length, or filters once the data is in memory or saved on
disk.

3.7.4.1 Acquisition Timing

A seismic signal is continuous. When this

continuous (or analog) signal enters the
seismograph, it is digitized at even intervals
and the resultant numbers are stored in
memory. The Sample Interval is the time
interval between data samples.

The sample interval is selected to match the

scale and type of the survey. Smaller sample
intervals (faster sample rates) should be used
for short surveys in hard materials (such as
rock and concrete). Slower sample rates are
used for long refraction surveys and reflection
surveys where events of interest arrive late in
time. Note: The ES-3000 hardware does not
support all of the sample rates and record
lengths displayed in this manual.

96
The Record Length is the length of the final record in seconds. This is the amount of time the
system listens for signals after each shot. In general, the longer the spread, the longer the required
record length.

There is a limit to the number of samples per each seismic trace. SGOS software comes standard
with enough memory for 16,000SGOS samples/trace, and 64,000MGOS samples/trace are available as
an option. There is an interplay between record length (in units of time) and sample interval. For a
fixed record time, the smaller the sample interval, the greater the number of samples per trace.
Conversely, for a given sample interval, the longer the record time, the greater number of samples
per trace. You will be notified it the parameters you choose exceed the maximum allowable
number of samples. A maximum record length for the selected sample interval is shown beneath the
record length window.

It is good practice to record only as long and/or sample only as fast as necessary to accomplish the
goals of the survey in order to conserve storage space. Each sample uses 4 bytes of storage
capacity, and this can add up quickly. Large data files can be cumbersome to work with, so you
should take care to keep them as small as possible. This is especially important if you are
transferring data via floppy disks. Note that there is a file size calculator above the Delay setting
that gives an approximate file size. The appropriate parameters depend on the type and goal of the
survey. Contact the factory if you need guidance.

Delay is used to postpone the start of the seismic record from the time the system receives a trigger
signal. For some applications, the early portion of the record will not contain usable information.
Typical of these are borehole surveys, where all the geophones may be located some distance from
the shot, and surveys where there is a significant offset from the first geophone. Use of the delay
allows the use of less memory and/or a faster sampling rate in these cases.

The delay time can also used to control the amount of data collected before the shot, or ‘pretrigger
time’. This is useful with some sources with uncertain timing. Just enter a negative number to
record pre-trigger data. It also helps the first-break picking program work more accurately, giving
the near phones more data to include in the computation.

The amount of delay will be added to the time lines on the screen and on the plotted record. Thus
the timing information in the display and plotted record automatically incorporates any delay used.

3.7.4.2 Correlation MGOS

This function provides access to

the correlation options. Correlation
is used if you are recording data
generated with a swept or pseudo-
random seismic source like a
Wacker (Mini-Sosie). See the
following section on filtering for
additional information regarding
specialized pilot-spiking filters.

97
 The next menu allows you to set the sweep
length, and the listen time. The sum of the sweep
and listen time should equal the record length.
You can also specify which channel you wish to
correlate against. A value of –1 disables the
channel

Don’t forget to check the correlation box to make

this option active.

3.7.4.3 Acquisition Filters

3.7.4.3.1 Data Filters

The next menu option allows

selection of the acquisition filters.
Acquisition filters are used to reduce
traffic, wind and cultural noise.

Two butterworth filters with a slope of 24 db/octave can be

run simultaneously. If you choose the same filter twice, it
doubles the filter slope. Note that acquisition filters are
destructive, meaning that data are irrevocably changed
once they are run. It is recommended that destructive
filtering be done by display filtering the data or perhaps
only in the processing phase of data collection, where
incorrect filter settings can be reversed.

3.7.4.3.2 Pilot Spiking FilterOPTIONAL

The pilot spike filter is required when using a pseudo-random source such as a construction
tamper popular in Mini-Sosie work. In this type of survey, a sensor, typically a heavily-damped
geophone, is placed on the base plate of the source.
The response from the base-plate sensor is recorded by
the pilot channel (see discussion of correlation below).
However, the data recorded from the base plate sensor
exhibits large post-impact excursions which are
unwanted in the correlation process. The idea pilot
signal has a single spike at the time of each impact.
Turning on the spiking filter attempts to remove these
extra bounces from the sensor and leave a comb
function in preparation for the correlation.

98
Enabling the pilot-spiking filter enables the menu opposite:
Two parameters must be set. Events recorded on the pilot channel that are greater than the
Amplitude Threshold (in millivolts) will result in a spike being generated in the filtered result at
that corresponding time. To eliminate spurious spikes being generated by the ringing of the base-
plate sensor, the operator can set a Holdoff Time.

Some experimentation is required to determine these settings, as the amplitude and ringing of the
base-plate sensor varies from system to system. Ask for Geometrics applications note on pseudo-
random sources if you plan on undertaking this kind of survey.

3.7.4.4 Stacking

Stacking or summing the data is the

process of adding data from successive
shots to improve the signal to noise
ratio of the data. Geodes and
StrataVisors have a virtually unlimited
number of stacks although for practical
purposes, often only a few stacks are
sufficient.

Note that the Geode acquisition boards (also used in the NZ) stack and correlate locally on the A/D
cards before transferring the data back to the host PC for display and storage. This can speed
production operations considerably, particularly for long record lengths and is a function that is
typical of distributed systems. However, this standard setting can be slightly disconcerting for the
first time user, since no data are displayed on the PC screen until the final stack count is reached.
Data can be optionally transferred after each shot for quality control purposes as described below,
but at the sacrifice of production speed.

The stacking menu allows you to control how stacking takes place. However, stacking and the
stacking menu are affected by the AUTOSAVE setting, which is found in the Storage
Parameters dialog box in FILE menu. The reason for this is that if the AUTOSAVE parameter
is set to ON, you are typically doing a reflection survey; if OFF you are doing a refraction survey.
There are exceptions to this, but as a generality it works well.

3.7.4.4.1 Stacking With AutoSave ON

The following menu is displayed if

AUTOSAVE is ON (see the Storage
Parameters submenu under the File main
menu)

o If AutoStack is enabled, the

seismograph will stack each subsequent
record to the previous automatically.
Data will be sent to the controller
o If Replace is enabled, each shot will
replace the previous one. This is useful

99
 in instrument testing and is not commonly used for surveys
o The Stack Limit determines how many acquisitions are added together before the data are
transferred to the control software and then saved in the designated storage device. The file
number automatically increments and the stack count is set back to 1. This is most useful in
production reflection surveys where the number of stacks per shotpoint is always the same.

Some applications, such as surface and downhole shear wave surveys, may require creative use of
the stack modes. Data may be manipulated, printed, and saved at any point.

NOTE: If the stack count is greater than 1, data will be automatically stacked locally in the Geode
boxes or on the NZ A/D cards before being displayed. Watch the status bar at the bottom of the
screen to ensure that you are acquiring data as expected. If you wish to see intermediate stacks for
quality control purposes, check the Display Intermediate Stacks box. Stacked data will be
transferred after each acquisition, giving the operator the option of aborting the shot if bad data are
encountered.

If you are collecting uncorrelated data and wish to then view the data correlated, you can select the
QC CORRELATE function from the DO_SURVEY menu and view the data correlated by the PC.
This correlation is slower than when done on the A/D cards.

o If STACK BEFORE CORRELATION is checked ( the correlator must be turned on in the

CORRELATION menu), then the raw data is stacked locally in each box until the stack
count is reached, at which point it is correlated and transferred back to the controller and
displayed. NOTE: No data is displayed on the controller PC’s screen until the stack count
is reached and the data transferred. Each time a new shot is acquired the status bar on the
bottom of the screen (shown below) will update, showing ACQUIRE as the data is being
collected locally in the Geodes (or in the NZ). The stack count will also increment. When
the stack count is reached, all data collected at the Geodes or locally inside the NZ will be
correlated then transfered back to the host computer and be displayed on the screen.

o If STACK AFTER CORRELATION is selected, data are correlated each time they are
acquired. This is a useful option if you
anticipate that the vibrator signal changes
significantly over the course of the stack,
such as when the base plate is sitting of soft
soil and compacting the ground underneath
it. When correlating in this mode, you also
have the option of Display Intermediate Stack which sends the new stack back each time
data are acquired. This is handy to QC vibrator data, but can slow down the survey.

3.7.4.4.2 Stacking With AutoSave OFF

If AUTOSAVE in the file menu is off, then the

stacking dialog box changes to the following:

Data will now be transferred on EACH shot and

displayed on the controller. It is up to the user to
manually save the data from the DO_SURVEY menu.

100
o If AutoStack is enabled, the seismograph will stack each subsequent record to the previous
automatically. Data will be sent to the controller

o If Replace is enabled, each shot will replace the previous one. This is useful in instrument
testing and is not commonly used for surveys

The Unstack Delay parameter is similar to the more familiar

Preview Stack mode found on previous Geometrics seismic
systems. Unstack Delay specifies the number of seconds that
the operator is shown the most recent stacked data (with the
last acquisition included), before the last acquisition is
subtracted and the record restored. While the stack is
displayed, the operator is presented with a menu to accept the
record if there is visible improvement, or reject the record if the data quality deteriorates. If rejected,
the data are not stacked and the stack count is decremented

3.7.4.5 Specify Channels

Specify Channels is used to select use of

each channel. In some surveys (particularly
borehole), less than the maximum number
of channels may be used. This option allows
the operator to disable unused channels,
reducing the amount of disk or tape space required to store a file, and allowing room for more files
on a disk or tape.

You will see that this menu is identical to the menu used in the Geometry section. In fact, some
geometry options can be changed here if convenient. Specifying how channels operate are
designated in the Use row, second from the bottom.

In addition to turning channels off by designating them as Inactive, channels may be labeled as
PilotMGOS, Aux or Data channels.

To change a channel designation, move the cursor to that channel and press the appropriate number
(1,2,3, or 4). Pressing either 1 or 4 (Data or Inactive) will set that channel and all of the channels to
the right of it to either Data or Inactive. See associated discussion in the GEOMETRY section of
this chapter.

Note: Some Geode systems have installed channels that are not connected to geophone inputs. This
is typical of systems with total number of channels that are not multiples of 8 (eg, 3, 6 or 12 channel
systems). These systems ship with the unused defined as INACTIVE. If these channels are
inadvertently turned on, associated traces will be displayed on the screen as straight lines and near-
zero data will be saved as part of each data file. It is recommended that these channels be again
specified as INACTIVE to avoid confusion when using the applications software.

101
3.7.4.6 Preamp Gains

The StrataVisorTM and Geode have analog

Preamp Gains that can be set to adjust the
amplitude of the signal being digitized.

Generally, you should try to set the gains has

high as possible without saturating the A/D,
causing distortion or ‘clipping’. Clipping is not an issue in refraction or downhole surveys in
which only the smaller first breaks are of interest, but it must be avoided in seismic reflection and
other surveys where the full waveform
is important. . Note that electronic
clipping discussed here is different
from display clipping, which can be
enabled in the Display menu. Display
clipping is simply a convenient method
for displaying the data and does not
affect the value of the data.

In this menu, you can set the channels

to either 24 or 36 dB. MGOS software
and hardware allows you to set
preamp gains to 12 or 24 dB with the
appropriate jumper change on the A/D
cards. A separate jumper setting also
permits 0 dB gain to be set for certain kinds of high input voltage measurements.

Gains may be configured to best fit the situation. For instance, if you are conducting a refraction
survey, you shouldn’t care about clipping and you can set all of the gains to 36 dB. If you are
doing reflection, you might set some sort of tapered gain, with those channels closest to the
source being set lower than those farther out.

If you choose Individual to set the gains individually, you will be presented with the menu above.

Setting the preamp gains individually works in a manner similar to setting the channel
specification to Data or Inactive. Every channel to the right of the one you change will change
with it.

3.7.4.7 Stack Polarity

Selecting stack polarity toggles

between positive and negative polarity.

102
3.7.5 File
3.7.5.1 Storage Parameters

The Storage Parameters menu allows you

to set up how and where to store the data.

Next File Number is the name of the next

file to be saved to disk. This can be up to
nine characters, and will automatically
increment each time a file is saved. Note:
The file number should be a numerical
integer, not alphanumerical.

If AutoSave is enabled, you will be

prompted for the Stack Limit. The data will
be saved automatically when the stack count
is reached. The first stack after saving will
replace the prior record in memory and the
stack count will be automatically set back to
1. In production shooting, AutoSave, along
with Shot Increment and Geophone
Increment can allow automated "hands off" operation.

In many types of surveys, particularly refraction, the stack count is often variable. In this case,
AutoSave is generally not used. Instead, the data are saved manually using the Save command in
the DoSurvey menu. Note: if using manual save, the data acquired prior to saving are not
replaced by the next stack, and the stack count is not reset to 1. After saving, you must clear the
data manually before moving the shot and continuing.

Data TypeMGOS determines which of the three standard formats the data will be saved in. In
general, if saving to disk, SEG-2 is a likely choice as this is the standard for portable
seismographs. It is designed for hard drive storage of seismic data. If you are writing to tape,
SEG-D or SEG-Y may be a better choice. What you choose should be compatible with the
processing software you intend to use. Contact the factory for references on these data formats.

If you enable Save to Disk, you should indicate the Path or folder you would like the data to be
saved in.

103
If you intend to Save to TapeMGOS, the tape drive must be plugged in to the SCSI port and
powered up before you boot the seismograph or laptop. Indicate the Tape Number of the first
tape. The tape number that each shot record is saved to will be indicated in the survey log, and if
you end up storing data on more than one tape, this is useful in finding individual shot records
later. This number should be updated whenever you change tapes.

3.7.5.2 Eject TapeMGOS

Allows you to eject the tape from the tape drive from within the controller program.

3.7.5.3 Read Disk

The Read Disk function

allows you to read
previously stored data into
memory for display on the
StrataVisorTM screen.
Simply choose the path and
filename of the file you
want to see and press
OPEN.

3.7.5.4 Read TapeMGOS

The Read Tape function allows you to read data from the tape back in to memory for display on
the StrataVisorTM screen.

104
Next will read the next record on the tape.

Previous will read the previous record on the tape.

Skip Forward allows you to skip a user-specified number of records forward on the tape.

Skip Backward allows you to skip a user-specified number of records backward on the tape.

File allows you to seek a user-specified record on the tape.

105
3.7.6 Display
The Display menu is for
controlling how data is displayed
on the StrataVisor or Geode
software. None of the settings in
this menu have any effect on the
data itself. All settings affect
data display only. You may
control the display
characteristics of the shot,
spectra, and noise data from this menu.

3.7.6.1 Shot Parameters

3.7.6.1.1 Display Boundary

The Display Boundary menu allows you to

determine how much of the total record is
actually displayed and printed. You are under
no obligation to display the entire record. You
can adjust the window of the data that you are
looking at to focus on events of interest.

3.7.6.1.2 Gain Style

There are three Gain Styles to choose from.

Fixed Gain applies the same gain multiple to the

entire length of an individual trace (but not necessarily the same gain to all traces). This is most
often the gain style of choice in refraction surveys.

AGC or automatic gain control strives to equalize the

amplitudes of early as well as late events in the seismic
trace. This gain style is very useful in displaying seismic
reflection data. The trace scale factor is adjusted
continuously during the record to adjust the trace
excursions regardless of the relative strength of
vibrations. If AGC is enabled, you must specify an AGC
Window. The optimum choice will depend on the data

106
and in particular the time length of the seismic wavelets in the data. The number entered should be
in data samples, between 2 and 1000. The best choice is empirically determined, but need not be
particularly precise. A wide range of values will give acceptable results. Windows that are too short
will distort the waveforms, those too long will obscure some reflections. The AGC algorithm in the
StrataVisor and Geode is the type commonly referred to as "digital AGC", which uses data in
advance of the particular sample. Thus, it will look ahead and reduce the gain before a large signal.
Since only the display is affected, experiment with different displays for a particular data set to see
which gives the best records. When in doubt, start with 250.

To control the overall trace amplitudes when using

AGC, you must specify a Trace Overlap. This is
simply a scale factor, applied after the AGC is
performed, that determines the display gain of each
trace expressed in terms of how much the traces
overlap each other. It is similar to Display Gains
(discussed below) except that it forces the display gain of each trace to be the same. In most cases
where you would use AGC, particularly reflection surveys, it us usually desirable to scale each
trace identically after AGC has been applied.

Experiment with the trace overlap parameter to get a feel for its effect on the display.

Normalize takes the maximum amplitude of each trace and scales the entire trace
proportionally by this value. This option is a good way of setting the gain on each channel
so that you can view them all equally (e.g. in terms of the maximum value obtained) for
each channel. As in AGC, the Trace Overlap value is used to set the size of the traces
when they are normalized.

107
3.7.6.1.3 Trace Style

The StrataVisorTM offers six different Trace Style

options: Variable Area, Wiggle Trace, Shaded Area,
and Clipped versions of each.

In Variable Area, the positive excursions are

shaded in black. This improves the operator's
ability to identify reflections and other events
when adjacent channels are compared.

Wiggle Trace displays the data in the traditional

wiggle trace line format, often better for picking
first arrivals.

Shaded Area is similar to variable area, except that the positive excursions are shaded in gray scale
instead of solid black. The traces themselves are black, and can be seen as they pass through the
gray shading.

If Clipped is enabled, the trace excursions are limited to prevent overlap between adjacent traces.
The waves will have flat tops instead of the normal curves. Clipping reduces confusion on the
record, preventing adjacent traces from obscuring the first breaks.

Experiment with the various trace styles to gain familiarity.

3.7.6.1.4 Display Gains

If you are using fixed gain, you may use the

Display Gains menu to control the trace
amplitudes.

Auto Scale Traces automatically selects the trace size values to display the data on the screen. The
Fixed Gain style is most often used in seismic refraction surveys, so this function attempts to set
the trace sizes in order to best display the first
breaks. With a new record, this function will
quickly get to the best choice or at least close
to the best choice. This utility is also contained
in the DoSurvey menu for convenience.

Only the portion of the record currently

displayed on the screen affects the calculation.
If you change the Display Boundaries after
scaling the data automatically, a different data
set will be displayed on the screen with a less
optimum choice. In that case, re-run Auto Scale Traces.

Adjust All and Individual are used to manually adjust the size of the trace excursions on the screen
and plotter. The relative amplitude scaling factors (trace sizes) are listed above the channel numbers

108
on the screen (and on the plotted record). The units are dB, incrementing in + or - 3 dB steps. A 3
dB step is an increase of 41% or a decrease of 29%. Two steps (6 dB) is double or one-half the
original value. When the display is set to Fixed Gain, the trace excursions and trace size factor can
be used to compare true amplitudes at the input. Thus, it is possible to measure attenuation and
vibration levels with the StrataVisor.

When Adjust All is chosen, the menu opposite will be

displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the shot record:

Each press of an up/down arrow key will increase/decrease the display gain of each channel by 3
dB.

When Individual is chosen, the menu opposite will be

displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the shot record. In
this case, the left/right arrows are used to move from channel
to channel. The number of the channel currently under control is displayed, the corresponding trace
is highlighted, and each press of an up/down arrow key will increase/decrease the display gain of
the highlighted channel by 3 dB.

Choosing Equalize Gains will set all of the display gains equal to the current display gain of
channel 1.

3.7.6.1.5 Display Filters

The StrataVisorTM is equipped with digital display

filters. Display Filters act only on the data display,
and do not affect the data stored to tape or disk.
Operation and effect are identical to those of
Acquisition Filters, except that in display filters
you may choose between 24 and 48 dB/octave filter slopes (all acquisition filters have attenuation
slopes of 24 dB/octave).

Filters are useful for reducing noise from

unwanted sources. This includes passing
vehicles, ambient wind noise, or even
coherent shot generated noise like ground
roll or air blast.

3.7.6.2 Spectra Parameters MGOS

The StrataVisorTM provides spectral analysis of all or a contiguous subset of channels. This can
be a very useful QC tool.

109
3.7.6.2.1 Display Boundary MGOS

Setting the Display Boundary is similar to that for the Shot Parameters window. You provide a
beginning and ending channel, but rather than supplying a beginning and ending time, you provide
a beginning and ending frequency.

3.7.6.2.2 Trace Style MGOS

Setting the Trace Style is identical to that for the Shot Parameters window.

110
3.7.6.2.3 Analysis Parameters MGOS

The Analysis Parameters dialog box allows you to set the time window of the seismic traces for
which you would like to compute the frequency spectrum.

You may choose to plot the spectrum display either vertically or horizontally.

Minimum 4-Term Window in Spectral Analysis applies a 4 point running average to the
spectrum.

3.7.6.2.4 Display Gains MGOS

Display Gains are identical to those in the Shot Parameters menu. The gain style in the spectra
display is always fixed gain.

111
3.7.6.3 Noise Monitor Parameters

The Noise Monitor Parameters dialog box

allows you to control the way noise is displayed
in the noise monitor screen. Set the Noise Scale
so that adjacent traces nearly overlap. Note: the
Noise Scale may also be changed if you are in
the noise monitor window by using the up and
down arrow keys. The scale can be viewed in
the upper left corner of the noise monitor.

When performing vibrator surveys, the noise displayed on the pilot signal is often much greater than
the acquisition channels so it is very helpful to reduce this so the rest of the display is not
overwritten. The pilot noise scale allows you to adjust the pilot noise level so all channels are
visible.

For systems with large numbers of channels, you may prefer to show each nth trace in blue for
convenience in locating yourself in the noise monitor and shot records. If you wish none of the
traces to be shown in blue, enter zero in this field.

3.7.6.4 Gather Parameters MARINE

If you have software with the marine option

enabled, you can perform single trace gathers
from successive shots. Near trace gathers allow
you to see trends in your data and often reflect
the geology should reflecting events be
present.

Up to 3 gather windows can be displayed at

any one time. The menu displayed opposite
allows you to control the deployment and
display parameters of gather windows. Options
include:
• Window Number, Add, Delete:
Allows you to specify, add or delete a
gather window.
• Offset Channel: Select the
channel to be used to construct the
gather
• Trace Width: define the width of the trace track in which the trace is plotted
• Gain Style: Select how gain is to be applied to the trace
• Trace Mute Threshold: Mutes front of trace. Warning: too large values may mute the
entire trace making it look like a straight line

112
 • File Overwrite Confirmation: Determines whether older gather files are to be written
over, appended to or the user prompted regarding their disposition
• Trace Style: Select visual plotting parameters
• Print Setup/Manual Print: Define printing parameters
• Display Filters: Define the real time filtering to be applied to the traces

3.7.6.5 Trigger Parameters MARINE

The trigger parameter window allows you to monitor the time

between shots (up going bars)and the amount of energy in a
specified trace window (down going bars). Trigger time is a
useful to determine whether shots have been missed or whether there are problems with the
navigation system. Gun energy allows you to monitor the energy performance of the air guns to
make sure they are firing consistently.

Scales and thresholds can be set for both

measurements. A specific channel, usually the
one closest to the boat, can be chosen for the
gun monitor.

The trigger/gun energy bar graph can be

printed as specified in the print dialog boxes.

3.7.6.6 Noise Parameters MARINE

Some surveys require a quantitative measure of

background noise, assessed on a periodic basis. The
noise window displays a bar graph of the noise in a user
defined time window, typically before the arrival of the
first breaks or at the end of the record. Several parameters can be defined by the user:

113
• Start/End Time/Channel:
define the boundaries of what is to
be displayed
• Noise Scale: maximum scale
on graph
• Transconductance: uV per
uBar as defined by the streamer
• Noise Peak Threshold: Noise
above which the bars turn red and
a warning is issued
• Noise Average Threshold:
Average acceptable noise level
• Print Parameter: Printing frequency and setup
• Auto Print Interval: Print a noise plot every n shots.

3.7.6.7 Geometry Tool Bar Display Settings

This menu turns

on and off
options for the
Geometry GUI
described in
section 3.8.

114
3.7.7 Do Survey

Once the system is set up, most of your interaction with the seismograph will be via the Do
Survey menu. This is the menu that appears by default whenever you press the MENU key on
the StrataVisor NZ keypad or ALT-7 on a laptop. Some items, such as Shot Location and Auto
Scale Traces, are redundantly located here for convenience. Note that many of the selections in
this menu have an associated "hot key" (the number to the right of the selection). You may
activate any of these from outside the menu system by pressing the appropriate hot key.

3.7.7.1 Arm/Disarm

The seismograph must be armed in order to respond to a trigger

signal and record data. The ready status of the system is always
displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the shot window. If
it says "Disarmed", you must Arm the system before recording
data. You may set the system to manual or auto arm (see
discussion on the System menu).

Pressing 1 alternately arms or disarms the system.

115
3.7.7.2 Clear Memory

Clear Memory will erase the current shot record from memory.
It has no effect on data stored on the hard drive. If you attempt to
clear the memory before saving the data, you will be warned that
the data is about to be lost. It is generally illogical and potentially
harmful to change certain parameters between stacks. As such,
certain parameters, such as those in the Acquisition menu,
require clearing the memory before they can be accessed. If you
attempt to change one of these parameters while data is in
memory, you will be prompted to clear the memory first.

3.7.7.3 Shot Location

Shot Location is redundantly located in the menu for convenience. It is also located in the
Geometry menu. Use it to update the shot location after each shot. If you have set the Shot
Increment or Geophone Increment to non-zero numbers (in a production reflection survey, for
example), then the shot location will be updated automatically each time a file is saved. See the shot
location section under the GEOMETRY menu for more description.

3.7.7.4 Noise Display

Choosing Noise Display will maximize the noise monitor window.

No other windows will be visible. The noise display shows the real
time output from signals from the geophones. See section 2.5.2 for
additional description.

3.7.7.5 Trace Display

Choosing Trace Display will maximize the shot record. No other windows will be visible.

3.7.7.6 Auto Scale Traces

Like Shot Location, Auto Scale Traces is redundantly located for convenience. It is also
available in the Display menu.

116
3.7.7.7 Save

You must manually Save each record you wish to keep unless
AutoSave is enabled. Note that there is a subtle difference in
operation depending on whether you are saving data
manually or automatically. It AutoSave mode, once the stack
limit is reached, the data will be saved, and the next shot will
replace the existing data and the stack count will be reset to
1. There is no need to clear data between shot points. In
manual save mode, you must clear the memory after saving.
If you don't, the first stack of the next shot point will simply be
summed with the previous record. See the Storage
Parameters menu for further discussion of the AutoSave
feature.

3.7.7.8 Print Shot Record

Print Shot Record simply prints the shot record in memory.

This can be new data or data that have been read from the
hard drive. The data will be plotted according to the
parameters set in the Display and Print menus. You may
abort a print operation by pressing the CLR key.

117
3.7.7.9 Q.C. Correlate MGOS

The Seismic Controller software can facilitate correlation directly on the

Geode/NZ acquisition cards, or can correlate data on the PC for quality
control purposes. Data that are correlated using the QC CORRELATE
function can be automatically saved if desired.

Warning: the PC based QC Correlate function is not as closely defined as the

in-box correlation. Thus, you may find that you can select record lengths
and sweep times that are out of range of the acquisition parameters. Please
take care when choosing QC correlate parameters so they match the settings
in the ACQUISITION menu.

Once you have selected this option, you are presented

with an additional menu that allows you to select the
current correlation parameters, separate from the
acquisition correlation parameters. This menu allows you
to choose the sweep length and the pilot channel. The
listen time will just be the difference between the sweep
length and the total record length set in the
ACQUISITION parameters. A summary of what
operations will be performed is shown in the dialog box
to help prevent confusion.

If you wish to use the QC Correlator as a

regular part of your survey, you can check
the Correlate Automatically box. This
performs a correlation whenever data are
received from the boxes. Again, there is a
summary of the operations that are
performed when correlate automatically is
selected. Note: the operations
undertaken when QC Correlate
Automatically is selected is affected by whether Auto Save (in the
FILE menu) has been selected.

3.7.7.10 Restore All Windows

Restores the windows back to the arrangement that was last set up.
Useful after you have viewed a window full screen and want to
look at all windows as you had last left them when they were all
displayed on the screen.

Note that the Restore All Windows command can be invoked with
the hot key ‘0’ (zero).

118
3.7.7.11 Roll Channels Up/DownMGOS

Roll channels is used to increment or decrement a

contiguous subset of active channels through the total
available channels in the seismograph system. It is a
common practice in CDP reflection surveying to
simulate the movement of an array of geophones over
the ground in conjunction with the movement of the
shot.

Set up this function by first going to the

Acquisition and Specify Channels menu
selection.

Next select the channels that you wish to turn off in

the Use portion of the menu. In the example
opposite, channels 13-24 have been set inactive,
while 1-12 are ready to collect data. In a CDP
reflection survey, this would allow 6 fold data
collection with a shot for each roll position.

Note that this would be a convenient time to set the

coordinates of your shot location, geophone
locations that can be found in the same menu.

At this point, it would be prudent to use the

Geometry menu to set up the increment that the shot is expected to move after each acquisition is
saved. Note that the roll function will automatically update the coordinates of the next set of
geophones. It is customary to set the Phone Increment to 0 (zero) when using the internal roll
function. The Phone Increment is only set to a positive (or negative) number when using an
external roll box which switches which geophones are connected to the seismograph channels
mechanically.

Type of Survey Shot Increment Phone Increment

Refraction Adjusted accordingly Usually 0
Downhole Typically zero Usually non-zero
Reflection (External Roll Box) Automatically Usually non-zero
incremented after each
save
Reflection (Internal Roll Function) Automatically Usually zero
incremented after each
save

119
The rolling operation can be selected from the Do
Survey menu.. It is possible to move the selected
group of active channels to the right (increment)
or to the left (decrement).

If repeated roll commands cause the active

channels to increment (or decrement) past the
total number of available channels, the number of
active channels will be reduced. This enables the
‘roll off’ feature common for terminating CDP
surveys.

Automatic Rolling can be accomplished be

setting this parameter in the GEOMETRY menu. Whenever data is saved, the active DATA
channels will roll in the direction specified.

3.7.7.12 Freeze Channels

Freeze Channels is a data protect function. When a channel or group

of channels are "frozen", they are protected against further stacking,
and also will not erase if the memory is cleared. When working in
noisy conditions, channels with good data can be frozen to protect
them while the remaining channels receive extra effort.

Choosing Freeze Channels will bring up the following:

To freeze a
channel, position the cursor on the desired one
and press 2. To unfreeze a channel, press 1.

120
3.7.8 Window
The Window menu allows you to control the configuration of the windows on the screen:

This menu is relatively self-explanatory. Windows can be maximized, tiled in different ways or
eliminated altogether from the display.

121
3.7.9 Answers
The Answers menu provides
refraction interpretation tools.
Also, you may run third-party
software from here. Remember, in
order to use the utilities in this
menu, you must enter the
geometry accurately in the
geometry menu.

3.7.9.1 Pick Breaks

The first step in analyzing refraction data is to identify the

first arrivals of seismic energy on each trace. These first
arrivals are identified as the first position where the trace
deflects from a straight line. There is an automatic first break picker in the software that will help
you identify the first break position. However, it will only work well when the picks (first
arrivals) are very distinct.

First, you will be asked to roughly identify the

beginning and end of the area on the seismic
record that contains the first arrival of energy.
A solid and a dashed red line will be shown
horizontally on the screen.

Use the arrow keys to move the top red line to

just above the area that contains the first
arrivals. Press the TAB key which toggles
control to the other red line used to define the
bottom of the pick area. This line is now made
solid and can be adjusted to be just below the
first break picks.

After you are satisfied with setting the pick

boundary, press Enter and the seismograph
will automatically pick the first breaks by
putting a red marker on each trace.

The trace for the geophone nearest the

impact point should have clear, early
arrivals. First arrivals on traces from
geophones further away should occur
progressively later in time. An example
record with first break picks is displayed
here.

This is a particularly good set of first arrivals

122
(picks) used for illustration - your data will not be as easy to identify and the automatic picking
will likely require some adjustment. You will be offered the option of manually editing the first
break picks. If you choose to do so, the trace you are operating on will be colored differently and
the arrow keys can be used to move the pick up or down the display. Adjust your picks until they
are similar to the ones shown above. It may be necessary to again go to the Display menu and
adjust the individual display gains to make the picks easier to see and edit.

After you have selected all of the first arrivals of energy, the picks can be saved on disk by
pressing Enter. The pick file will be saved with the same name as your data file, but with the
extension ‘.bpk.’. These files can be retrieved later for interpretation.

3.7.9.2 Solve Refraction Using SIPQC

SIPQC is an interactive refraction interpretation program. It was originally developed by Jim

Scott at the United States Geological Survey and has been commercialized under his company
RimRock Geophysics. The software is now imbedded in the StrataVisor NZ and Geode
SGOS and MGOS operating software.

SIPQC uses first break pick files to generate a velocity cross section of the area under your
seismic line. It will calculate a depth at each geophone if the data is of sufficient quality and
density, otherwise it will estimate depth under each shot point. Up to 7 shots can be used in the
analysis. First, all of the data files must have their first arrivals picked.

3.7.9.2.1 Selecting First Break Pick Files

Next, select Answers from the DoSurvey menu and choose

Solve Refraction Using SIPQC.

Choose the menu that contains the sample

refraction data and choose 5 of the data files.
You will be asked to give your spread a name
that will help you track your interpretation.

123
 The adjacent Time-Distance graph
shows all of the first break picks
from each of your picked shot
records. Each pick has been replaced
with a number indicating the layer
that the seismograph program
estimates the energy has penetrated
to. Picks from the same shot point
are joined by a straight line.

3.7.9.2.2 Layer Assignments

The seismic program is not perfect at assigning

layering and will often require editing to ensure that
the intepretation program will operate properly.
However, this can be accomplished by following a
few simple rules.

The point at which a series of picks changes from

one layer to another is known as a hinge point (see
arrow). Hinge points are generally identified when
there is a reduction in the slope of the line of picks.

However, changes in slope can also be caused by

irregular refractor topography. To check that this is
not the case, you must compare the line of picks at
the same location with another shot from the same side of the spread, but arriving later in time.

The figure opposite

shows such a
comparison. The lower
shot (line shown in
light gray) shows a
potential hinge point at
the 4th geophone. The
shot above (outlined in
darker gray) shows NO
equivalent hinge point.
This confirms that the

124
hinge point on the lower t-d curve is valid and the
numbering should progress from layer 1 to layer 2.

Proceed by assigning layers to the t-d plot for each

shot. This may take some practice and you should
consult other books on refraction surveying to
review the layer assignment process. Here, a figure
is shown with all layers assigned for a two layer
interpretation.

3.7.9.2.3 Running the Interpretation

Once you are satisfied with the layer

assignment, you can run the interpretation
by pressing Continue. Depending on the
speed of the CPU, this may take a few
seconds. A display similar to the one
opposite will appear, showing a
boundary(s) between the assigned layers.
Any questionable first break picks will
show as question marks on the plot. Letters
indicate emergent ray points. For more
detail, refer to the SIPQC manual.

To see a color
version of the
display with the
calculated
velocities, press
Toggle Plot. The
following display
will be shown.

125
You can return to the layer assignment plot by pressing Back to try other layer assignments
reflecting other interpretations.

3.7.9.3 Launch Oyo First Break Picker

A separate first break pick program is bundled into the

MGOS and SGOS software. This software is also available to run directly on your PC. See the
SeisImager documentation for a complete description of this software.

3.7.9.4 Launch OYO Refraction Analyzer

A separate refraction analysis package called SeisImager is bundled with MGOS and SGOS
software. This software is also available to run directly on your PC. See the SeisImager
documentation for a complete description of this software or download a demonstration version
of the software from Geometrics web page.

126
3.7.10 Print

The Print menu allows you to set up the printing

parameters for the shot and spectra records.

3.7.10.1 Shot Print Parameters

The Shot Print Parameters dialog box allows

you to set the Print Scale and the Auto Print
Interval. Setting an Auto Print Interval of zero
disables this capability. You may also print
manually from this box by pressing the Print
Now button (it is usually simpler to print from
the Do Survey menu). Print scaling can be
selected with the radio buttons. Note that print
scaling is separate from the display scaling.

127
3.7.10.2 Spectra Print Parameters MGOS

The Spectra Print Parameters dialog box

allows you to set the Auto Print Interval
and to print the spectra manually.

128
3.7.11 System

This menu sets the majority of system

parameters, operates the test systems, sets
triggering parameters and several other
system functions.

3.7.11.1 Set the Date, Time,

and Units.

This option is used to set time and date, as well as

specify the units that are displayed on graphs and
stored in the SEG headers. Note that the units have no
actual effect on calculations of depth and distance,
which are unitless.

3.7.11.2 Trigger Options

3.7.11.2.1 Trigger Holdoff

Use the Trigger Options menu to set the Trigger

Holdoff and the Arm Mode. The trigger holdoff sets
the minimum time between triggers, and is used to guard against false triggers. The system will
ignore any triggers arriving within the trigger holdoff time of the last trigger. For instance, if the
system is triggered and the holdoff time is set to two seconds, the system will not respond to
subsequent triggers until two seconds have passed.

3.7.11.2.2 Arm Modes

There are two arm modes. If Auto is selected, the

system will automatically rearm itself after each shot.
In Manual mode, the system must be manually armed
after each shot. In most production work,
particularly when using a vibrator, auto mode is
usually best. It is also preferable when using
explosives, as it is better to get a false trigger than to
forget to arm the system and miss a shot. Manual

129
arm mode is most useful when working near power lines or other potential sources of annoying
false triggers.

3.7.11.2.3 Trigger Sensitivity

Trigger Sensitivity adjusts the voltage level necessary to trigger the seismograph from the trigger
input connector. Usually a low trigger sensitivity is sufficient when using an electromechanical
device like a geophone for triggering. Other devices may need higher trigger sensitivities. If you
are experiencing repeated, uncontrollable triggers, try decreasing the trigger sensitivity until this
stops. If triggers continue, look for noise sources that may be introducing pulses into the trigger
system. Sometimes this can be radio interference, other forms of inductive coupling, or problems
with grounding.

Master Trigger Line # indicates the line number on which the trigger should occur.

Geode or NZ# indicates the Geode number or board set that will be receiving the trigger. By
default, Geode number 1 is closest to the controller on the Ethernet line. NZ triggers are always
wired on board number 1, line 1.

3.7.11.2.4 StrataVisor NZ and Geode Self-Triggering

The Self Trigger option is available for monitoring purposes. It allows you to monitor one or
more channels for a seismic event. If an event meeting your criteria occurs on any (or all) of the
designated channels, the seismograph will trigger and record the data.

The event detection algorithm works as follows: on each designated monitoring channel, noise
samples are gathered from the data stream. Average RMS values of the noise are calculated for
two contiguous time windows. If the ratio of the average energy in Window 2 divided by the
average energy of Window 1 is more than a certain threshold, an "event" is detected by that
particular channel.

The lengths of Window 1 and Window 2 are selected by the user, as is the threshold ratio
required for an event. Window 2 covers the most recently acquired data. Window 1 covers data
prior to that. The windows do not overlap. A more detailed description of how an event is
identified is given later.

Checking the Self Trigger Enabled box will

enable event detection triggering.

The system can be configured to trigger if a

single channel receives an event, or if a
combination of channels receive an event
simultaneously. The OR Channel numbers will
set the channels for which, if an event is
detected in any one of the specified channels,
the StataVisor will trigger.

130
The AND Channel numbers sets the system such that an event must be detected on all of the
monitoring channels in order for the StrataVisorTM to trigger.

Time window 1 specifies the length of the first (earlier) time window. The unit of time length is
Noise Blocks, which is 40 times the sample interval. The string to the right of the entry ("=xxx
ms", in the above picture) will tell you how long this is in milliseconds when a value is entered.

Time window 2 specifies the length of the second (most recent) time window.

The Ratio is the threshold value for the average RMS noise in Window 2 divided by that in
Window 1 required for an event. The larger the ratio, the larger the event must be in order to
cause a trigger.

Once the Seismic Controller Software has determined that a suitable event has been detected, a
trigger is generated in one of two ways depending on the setting of the next radio boxes:

o If Trigger Via Network is selected, when an event is detected a command is sent over
the network to the Geode designated as the master trigger device, which triggers all other
Geodes are simultaneously. This method works well when precise absolute time
accuracy is not required as the shot record is recorded and time stamped using the local
PC clock

o If Trigger via RS-232/GPS) is selected, a byte is immediately sent out the RS-232 port
of the PC control device. This byte is to be used with an external device to generate a
trigger pulse known precisely in absolute time. Geometrics provides an exact timing
device that AND’s the output byte from the controller with a 1 pps pulse from a GPS
receiver. This external device generates a pulse used to trigger the Geodes at a time
known with absolute accuracy by the GPS. The GPS then sends this absolute time back
to the PC controller via the RS-232 port, where it is read and used to time stamp the
record. This method, in combination with an appropriate pretrigger time, permits the

131
 collection and accurate time stamping of an event for earthquake recording, crustal
refraction surveys, or surveying where time of event is required.

Note: It is advisable to use a negative trigger delay (pretrigger memory) in order to

ensure that the onset of the event is recorded. Otherwise you risk missing some of the
desired data. Also, in most monitoring applications, AutoSave should be enabled and the
Stack Limit should be set to 1.

3.7.11.2.5 Self-Triggering, Detailed Description

Geometrics seismic event detection software allows you to monitor one or more channels for a
seismic anomaly. If an event meeting your criteria occurs on any (or all) of the designated
channels, the seismograph will trigger and record the data.

On each designated monitoring channel, noise samples are gathered from the continuously
recorded data. Average RMS values are calculated for two adjacent contiguous time windows. If
the ratio of the average energy in Window 2 divided by the average energy of Window 1 is more
than a certain threshold, an "event" is detected by that particular channel. This method similar to
the ‘STA/LTA’ algorithm used in earthquake monitoring.

The lengths of Window 1 and Window 2 are selected by the user, as is the threshold ratio
required for an event.

The system can be configured to trigger if a single channel receives an event, or if all of a set of
channels receive an event simultaneously.

Combinations of channels can be used to detect specific events or eliminate false triggers.

• Events detected on designated ‘OR’ channels will trigger the seismograph when any one of
the specified channels sees an anomaly.

• Events detected on designated ‘AND’ channels will trigger the seismograph when all of the
specified channels see an anomaly.

Once an event is detected in the decimated data stream, a command is sent to start the
seismograph recording at a user defined sample rate and record length. Some variation in the
process exists between models. The StrataVisor NX uses an external trigger box. The Geode/NZ
recorders require no external hardware. All boards trigger simultaneously with no delay.

Once a trigger is generated, the appropriate data in the A/D cards (possibly including data from
before the event was identified) are transmitted to the seismic control PC and stored in a user-
defined format. A time stamp is added to the data either by the PC, or by an optional external
GPS if greater accuracy is required.

Once this process is complete, the seismograph returns to its armed state and continues to
monitor the decimated data stream, ready to trigger again when an anomaly is detected.

132
Geometrics StrataVisor and Geode seismographs collect data continuously at the system’s
maximum sample interval. Data are temporarily stored on the A/D cards in memory that is
configured as a circular buffer. These data are transmitted to the seismic controller PC in two
ways, either as

• a decimated continuous stream of data used for event monitoring purposes

• a seismic data file at a user defined sample rate and record length, sent in
response to either a hardware or software command

The decimated continuous stream of data can be used to measure the output from the sensors
attached to the system, almost in real time. Geode/NZ data are decimated as shown in the table
opposite. StrataVisor NX data are decimated to 40 samples per second. Once an event condition
is detected in the decimated data stream, a command is sent to the A/D cards to send the more
densely sampled data at a user defined sample rate. This is possible even though some time has
passed because earlier data are still in the circular buffer and can be retrieved before they are
overwritten by more recently sampled data. The amount of data sent before the event was
detected is determined by a ‘pretrigger’ recording time, set by the operator.

The continuous decimated noise data used to detect an event are partitioned into 40 sample
‘blocks’ to make computation easier and demand less resources from the CPU. Two adjacent
windows are constructed from these noise blocks and the RMS values from each noise window
are calculated and compared. If the ratio between these windows exceeds a user defined
threshold, a trigger command is generated for the A/D cards to send the more densely sample
data, as specified by the required sample rate and record length.

Sample Block
The threshold calculation Interval (usec) 3.7.11.2.5.1 Decimation Length
is undertaken on all Factor (ms)
channels, and these 20.83 240 200
channels may be compared 31.25 160 200
using AND or OR Boolean 62.5 80 200
logic, as dictated by the 125 40 200
requirements of the survey. 250 20 200
This threshold calculation 500 10 200
is repeated on all channels 1000 5 200
each time a noise block is 2000 2 160
received from each 4000 1 160
channel. 8000 1 320
16,000 1 240

When using AND channels to trigger, the length of the W1 and W2 windows should be sufficient
so that the event being measured exceeds the threshold value for a long enough time period for

133
the event to be registered as detected in other monitoring channels as well. If this condition is not
met, a trigger will not be generated even though all channels may have detected the event
individually at different times. This is particularly true for events that do not excite the sensors
simultaneously. Detection of non-
simultaneous events can be partly improved
using the “Minimum Number of Channels”
box setting. If this is set to be less than the
total number of channels, then the system
will trigger without all AND’d channels
detecting an event.

Note that an appropriate sample rate

should be chosen since it effects both the t=0
decimated noise sample rate and the final Window 1 RMS = 10
record sample rate. With an incorrect Window 2 RMS = 50
sample rate, it is conceivable that higher
Window 1 Window 2
frequency events may be aliased and not
be detected. Consult the decimation chart t = 30
above to minimize this effect. In Window 1 RMS = 10
addition, some short time periods may Window 2 RMS = 100
occur between noise blocks where no
Window 1 Window 2
data are transmitted.
t = 60
Window 1 RMS = 13
GPS Time Stamp for Self-Triggered Window 2 RMS = 100
Data
Window 1 Window 2
If an accurate time of trigger is required, t = 70
Geometrics provides a GPS and trigger Window 1 RMS = 17
synchronization circuit to time stamp Window 2 RMS = 100
each record, accurate to a few Window 1 Window 2
microseconds. The system is composed t = 80
of the following parts: Window 1 RMS = 20
Window 2 RMS = 100
• GPS clock
• Trigger synchronization box Window 1 Window 2
• Seismic recorder (Geode, NZ or NX) Time sequence progression of the
• Control computer detection of an event.
The system functions as follows:

1 - The GPS provides a continuous 1 pulse per second pulse train to the in put of the trigger
synchronization box.

134
2 – when an event is detected from the decimated data stream by the PC control software, an
enable command is sent out the RS-232 port to the trigger synch box. This allows the next GPS
pulse to be transmitted from the synch box to the hardware trigger input of the seismograph,
which triggers the seismograph at a precisely known time. This known time, generated by the
GPS, is simultaneously sent via the RS-232 port to the seismograph control software, where it is
included in the data header.

To enable the external GPS trigger via the trigger synchronization box, select the ‘Trigger Via
RS-232/GPS’option on the self-trigger dialog box.

3.7.11.2.6 Continuous Recording

Geode/NZ seismographs are also capable of recording continuously at some sample rates. Data
are cut into appropriate sized files dictated either by software settings or by an external pulse
train, typically supplied by a GPS for accurate time stamping. Contact the factory for more
discussion of this option.

3.7.11.3 Test

3.7.11.3.1 Run Analog TestMGOS

Analog testing currently requires a Geometrics external test box capable of producing high
accuracy waveforms. Software built into the Geode and NZ systems coordinate the acquisition of
these signals and perform an analysis for a variety of tests, as specified by user selectable scripts.
Testing is fully automatic and provides two types of reports. The first is a summary including
specific information regarding failures. The second, more detailed reports provides specifications
on a channel by channel basis and can be several pages long.

135
‘Please refer to Geometrics test box manual for specific instructions.

3.7.11.3.2 Geophone Test MGOS

The StrataVisorTM and Geode systems are capable of sending a voltage pulse out the geophone
inputs to evaluate geophone performance and to test for cable problems. The resulting waveform
is captured and analyzed by the StrataVisorTM for the operator to take corrective action. The test
is repeated continuously at 2-second intervals to monitor changes in line conditions to see if the
corrective action has been successful.

Beginning the geophone test will display the following window:

136
Two types of analysis are performed on the recorded waveforms from the line pulse test, and are
shown graphically as two sets of bar graphs on the Geode/StrataVisorTM display. The first test
(shown by bar graphs A and B) is known as the ‘match’ test and the second test (graphs C and D)
is the ‘noise’ test.

The analysis begins by first calculating a ‘median’ response of the captured waveform. After
eliminating data from obvious open or shorted traces, a relative measure of how the median
response compares with each trace is presented in the top bar graph (A). The standard deviation
of the last 5 tests is shown in the inverted bar graph directly underneath (B).

The noise test is performed by creating a first derivative median trace, and comparing it to the
first derivative of the other traces in a similar fashion. The results of each test are presented in the
top graph of the bottom set of bar graphs (C). The standard deviation of the last 5 tests is shown
in an inverted bar graph directly underneath (D).

Open geophones or cable breaks are shown as dashed bars. Bad or noisy phones show responses
on either the match (top set) or noise (bottom set) of bar graphs. Sticking or broken phones in
strings of geophones are more subtle and show up more clearly in the deviation (inverted B or D)
bar graphs.

A dialog line is shown at the top of the graph with the match and noise values for each channel.
Using the left and right arrow keys moves between individual channels and displays the
corresponding analysis.

The test is terminated when the CLR key is pressed, and the operator can then print a hardcopy of
the results by pressing ENTER or abort by pressing CLR again.

The Geode/StrataVisorTM display then shows the trace data from the last test, which can be scaled
and printed and saved for visual inspection of geophone impulse response.

Some experience may be necessary to recognize faults and bad geophones. Note that this is a
relative technique and does not provide quantitative information about geophones. This is not

137
possible due to differing line lengths and geophone configurations. Suspected bad strings and
cables can be located with the StrataVisorTM line test and then verified quantitatively with a
certified geophone testing instrument. Note also that the statistical analysis identifies geophones
that are different from the average; that doesn't necessarily mean a geophone is bad. A perfectly-
functioning 40 Hz geophone would therefore be flagged by this test if the rest of the geophones in
the line are 14 Hz.

3.7.11.3.3 Update Acquisition Board Bios (LOADER)

NOTE: This is a dangerous process and you may damage your Geode system. Contact the
factory, and read this documentation carefully to make sure that you really need to
undertake this procedure. Follow all steps exactly. Failure to follow these procedures make
result in alteration of the Geode/NZ firmware that can only be fixed by returning the
instruments to the factory.

The firmware loader is a part of the Geode acquisition board that resides in flash memory. It is
never lost by power down. The loader program runs like BIOS in a PC. It is the boot load code
that talks to the controller and loads the Geode operating system code each time the Geode
acquisition board is powered up.

Geometrics may upgrade this code to provide new features and commands between the controller
and the Geode acquisition board. Contact Geometrics periodically or check our web site for
announcements of upgrades

The software included in MGOS burns the

firmware with a new version of the Geode
internal operating software. All Geodes and all
lines are updated at one time.

Note: If you have firmware version lower than 2.5 or lower,

do not use this option to burn the Geode firmware. Version
2.717 and lower generally coincides with Geodes with the
GREEN power button on one side. Contact customer
service for advice on how to burn this Geode or NZ

If you have firmware version 2.5 or higher,

your can procede with using this software to
upgrade your firmware.

Check the firmware from the

SYSTEM>VERSION NUMBER option, and
check the LOADER SOFTWARE VERSION
to determine the firmware version.

138
 Note: We strongly recommend that you contact the factory and talk with customer
service before proceeding with burning your firmware. This is a dangerous process
and you can damage your system resulting in a factory return. When done properly
this is a safe procedure, but should not be done unnecessarily.

3.7.11.3.3.1 Downloading and Burning New Geode Software

Please follow all steps exactly as shown:

1) Download updated flash loader firmware from the FTP site on the Geometrics web site. The
file will resemble the following: (Flash2_714&2_41.exe). The numbers will be different
and depend on the version of the flash loader. This example has placed the flash loader
on a floppy disk drive, which resides in the A: drive on the controller.

Do Not Remove the Power Cable from the Geode or NZ while Updating
the Firmware

2) From the SYSTEM>TEST menu, select Update Acquisition Board Bios (LOADER) from
the test menu.

3) Read the warning screen carefully and follow any cautions outlined in the message.

139
4 ) Click on I Agree to proceed.

5) The dialog box opposite will appear. Use the

browse button to select the firmware version that you
have downloaded from Geometrics web site.
Remember, it should be version 2.718 or above.

6) Press the Start Burning button. You

will be asked to confirm the burning when
presented with another dialog box. Once
confirmed, the following dialog box will
appear and burning will start. A countdown
timer will show the duration of the burning
process. Note: do not remove power from
the NZ or Geode while the burning is
taking place.

7) A dialog box will be

displayed indicating
the estimated burning
time remaining.

140
8) Once burning is complete, the following dialog box will appear:

Do NOT Remove Cable or Power From Geodes YET.

If the power LED on the Geode is blinking rapidly, burning is taking place. If the LED is blinking
3 seconds on and 1 second off, burning has been successful. If there is no blinking, its time to call
Geometrics! Burning must be undertaken at the factory.

Exit the program to close the software.

9) Turn off all of the Geodes by disconnecting the power cord. Turn them back on by plugging
them back in and making sure that the power button is pressed.

The next steps will check to see if all the boards in the
Geode were properly programmed.

10) When the program is running click on the <System>

pull down tab.

11) From the System pull down screen select the Version
number. Check each Geode board version by using the
arrow keys >> or << to move between board sets.
There are 8 channels per board. This example has only
one acquisition board set.

12) If all went well, you are done.

141
This is one possible error that may be seen if the Geode is not properly connected to the
Controller. In case of this type of error check your Geode connections. Make sure it has power.
Make sure the Link light is on. Go back to the beginning and restart the process.

13) If the Geode is not responding after a Flash update, even after a power down and back up,
call Geometrics Customer service.

3.7.11.4 Enabling Repeaters and Disabling Acquisition Cards MGOS

Geode and NZ A/D board sets house 8 channels each. Up to 3 board sets (24 channels) can be in
each Geode module and up to 8 board sets can be in each StrataVisor NZ.

It is possible to turn off the A/D function so that each board sets simply acts as a repeater and
passes data on to the next active board set. This function is handy if you wish to extend the
distance between active, acquiring Geode modules, or if you simply wish to remove some
channels from your system as if they were not there at all. For example, if you were using 24
channel Geodes and wished to extend the distance between active recording Geodes, you could
enable all boards in the units between active Geodes and double the transmission distance.

To enable this option, choose “Select Repeater

Board(s) from the system menu shown
opposite. You will immediately be presented
with an additional menu indicating that the
MGOS seismograph program will
automatically restart after you have made your
selection in the following menus. The program
needs to be restarted as system settings in the
Geodes are enabled at a very low level and this
is only done at startup.

After choosing yes, the following menu will

appear:

A field is shown for each line that the system

found on startup. In each field, you can enter

142
the number of the board set that you wish to have enabled as a repeater. Remember, the board set
and its associated channels will essentially disappear, and not be available again until these
settings are changed. Note that you can specify a range of boards (3-8) or individual boards,
separated by commas.

If you wish to have these settings enabled you must check the box labeled “Enable Repeater
Mode” before the setting will take place. When you click on the OK button, your system will
restart, enabling repeaters and active channels as you have specified.

There are other combinations of disabling channels, depending on your field situation and
cabling. For example, if you own 24 channel Geodes and own 8 channel cables for larger scale
surveys, you may wish to enable the last two board sets in each Geode as repeaters.

Note that repeater mode differs from the menu setting in the ACQUISITION menu to simply
disable channels. Disabled channels can be turned on or off at any time and in combinations other
than in 8 channel groups.

3.7.11.5 Serial I/O MGOS

Facilitates data communication between the

seismograph and other external serial devices like
vibrators, guns, navigation systems and
streamers. Geode/StrataVisor systems can either
send data to other devices or receive data that is
automatically integrated into the header of the
seismic data.

Choosing the Serial Input fly-out option presents the following menu:

Choose the settings that pertain to the

configuration that you are operating, by
selecting the COM port, parity, stop bits and
whether you want the end of a string
recognized as a carridge return (CR) or a line
feed (LF). You also have the choice of
concatenating several strings or simply
storing a single string. Settings for a
downhole Durant counter are also included.
Note that if you have a GPS receiver
attached, you must check the Replace PC
time Stamp with GPS Time checkbox to use
the GPS time.

Some customization may be required for

non-standard devices. Please contact
Geometrics to discuss your requirements. Remember to make this option work, you must check
the ‘Serial Input Enabled’ box.

143
Serial output works in much the same way. Selecting the serial output flyout yields the following
menu:

When serial output is enabled and the OYO compatible radio button selected, the file number,
tape, number of active channels is sent out the selected serial port. This option is often used when
passing information to a navigation system.

3.7.11.6 Manual Trigger

The Manual Trigger utility is used to

trigger and record data from the keypad,
without the need for an external trigger
source. This is useful for testing or
recording background seismic noise. The
manual trigger is almost never used to
record real seismic data, since analysis
depends on exactly synchronizing the
seismograph with the energy source.

3.7.11.7 Configuration Status

3.7.11.7.1 Configuration Status Menu

The configuration status option allows you to query

the status of all Geodes and all individual board sets
on each line

144
The configuration status menus contain a great deal of information that indicates how your
system is operating. The system is checked every few seconds to determine whether all
operations are normal.

The top of the menu indicates which line

number, which Geode and which board set
are currently being interrogated. You can
click on the right and left arrows in
opposing corners of the menu to view the
status of other Geodes and board sets.
There are many items that pertain to
debugging the system if there are
difficulties, but some of the more important
settings deserve additional explanation:

Battery Voltage: Indicates the voltage of

specified board set in specific Geode. Note
that all board sets in each Geode should
indicate roughly the same voltage. If the battery
voltage drops below 10.4 volts, a warning will
be displayed. If the voltage drops further below
the 9 V critical level, an error is reported.

Ethernet 1 Connection: Indicates whether the

downstream connector on the Geode (arrow out
of the circle) that sends data back to the
controller or downstream Geode. If this
connection is backwards, a warning is displayed.

Ethernet 2 Connection: Indicates whether the

upstream connector on the Geode (arrow into the
circle) is connected to the downstream connector
of the previous Geode (arrow out of the circle).
If this connection is backwards, a warning is
displayed.

Ethernet 1 and 2 Link: Tests to determine if the digital interface between Geodes is working
properly in the upstream and downstream directions.

Acquisition Board Position: If there are more than 8 channels in a Geode, this indicates the A/D
board position in the board stack.

Master Trigger: Displays whether this board set has been enabled as the master trigger.

The remaining parameters show verification of acquisition parameters and other system settings.

145
3.7.11.7.2 Error Conditions Shown By the Configuration Status Menu

If an error condition occurs, the configuration status dialog box automatically pops up and
displays the status of the Geode board set that caused the error. Since there are many parameters
to check, the specific error(s) is located at the top of the screen between the square brackets […..].

Shown in the opposite menu is an error

condition caused by disconnecting the
line between two Geodes. Note the white
‘X’ circled with red to indicate a critical
error. The system correctly identifies
where the error has occurred and suggests
a solution.

If the error is located further up the line,

an X error symbol is located next to the
right arrow. If the error is closer to the
controller, the arrow is located on the left.
Pressing the appropriate arrow button
pages to the Geode indicating a fault
condition.

Some error conditions are not as critical and only

a warning triangle is shown. These errors can
often be fixed without restarting the line.

Some errors are simply annoyances and can be defeated if they are showing frequently. For
example, the system will first start warning you of depleted batteries when their voltage reaches
10.4V. If you wish to ignore this warning and continue surveying, you can check the appropriate
dialog box on the bottom if the configuration status menu, shown below.

146
3.7.11.7.3 Signaling at a Specific Geode

If you wish to indicate to your field crew that they should investigate a particular Geode, you can
press the “Blink This Board Power Led for 15 Sec” button to start a rapid pulse blink on the
indicated Geode. This menu option is shown above. You can use the left and right arrow keys to
select other Geodes. Newer versions of Geodes also have a beeper in the Geode box which gives
an audible indication of where the box is located.

3.7.11.8 Alarms

The Geode/NZ system has a series of alarms that can be

used to alert the operator of error and warning conditions.
Warnings can be audible or visible. Most are self-
explanatory. All can be defeated either through this menu
system, or interactively when the warning dialog box
appears. Critical errors like overdriven channels and tape
errors are written to the log file.

You will see only the alarms enabled by the options that you have purchased with your software,
as some alarms are specific to marine, self-triggering or monitoring applications. Some alarms
will write a status message to the survey log file, and others, like Report Self-Trigger Shot, will
display a special dialog box designed to get the operator’s attention

147
3.7.11.9 Calibration Mode

Geode/NZ acquisition boards are self calibrating

to remove DC offset. This maintains the dynamic
range of the system and allows simultaneous
measurement of small and large signals.
Calibration takes approximately 2 seconds. There
are some situations when it is desirable to defeat
the calibration, for example if you are stacking
very quickly, or if you are doing marine surveys
where the inter-shot times need to be small.

By choosing to calibrate every nth saves, you can

ensure periodic measurement appropriate to the
kind of survey you are undertaking. Also by
keeping the temperature of the instrument stable,
you can minimize the need for calibration.

3.7.11.10 Channel Remapping

Channel remapping allows you to change

1. the order of channels on each analog spread
cable that connects to the Geode
2. reorder the Geode boxes.

You would use this option if your cables were wired

opposite to the default order normally used in
Geometrics wiring, if you wished to turn your line
around to have the low channels at the opposite end, or if your cables had a wiring error. Channel
remapping is also often necessary when using more that a single network cable.

3.7.11.10.1 Default cable wiring of Geometrics seismographs

Default order is defined as the natural electrical order in which channels are oriented when the
system first powers up before remapping. Refer to Section 3 under Connector Wiring that
discusses standard wiring configurations. You may have requested a custom wiring configuration
from Geometrics. If you are confused about your wiring, contact the factory and refer to the serial
number and job number.

Digital
cable
Geode cables are typically wired in a ‘high-side
configuration’, meaning that the Geode connects closest
to the highest numbered channel on the analog cable. The

148
figure above shows this configuration for a single box system, with 24 channels.

3.7.11.10.2 Multiple Geodes

The following diagram shows a default single digital line (one network card) system with 3
Geodes. Note that Geode one is always closest to the controller in a default configuration.

3.7.11.10.3 Multiple Network Lines

The next diagram below shows a default configuration with two digital lines (two network cards)
with the controller positioned in the middle. Line 1 is on the left and line 2 is on the right. One
might use two lines to increase data throughput to reduce time between shots. Like the
configuration above, the Geodes are numbered starting closest to the controller. The seismic
controller software labels all of the channels contiguously even though they are on two separate
digital lines. However, if the lines are collinear, the first line will have the channels ordered
backwards. This can be easily rectified with the remapping feature.

There are two ways of remapping channels: automatic mode and manual mode. Automatic mode
settings are listed on the top of the remapping dialog box, and manual mode on the bottom.

149
3.7.11.10.4 Automatic Channel Remapping

Automatic channel remapping allows you to reverse

either the order of the Geodes on the line, or

Reverse Geodes

Reverse Cable

reverse the order of the channels on the spread cable.

The above diagram shows the result after both channels and Geodes have been reversed,
renumbering the line so that low channels start on the left hand side and increase towards the
right. In the dialog box, the automatic remapping boxes referencing line 2 remain unchecked,
since the default orientation on line two was correct.

3.7.11.10.5 Manual Channel Remapping

Channels can be remapped on an

individual basis using the Manual Map
Mode. Select the appropriate check box,
and enter the order in which you would
like the channels that differs from the
default order. You can specify individual
channels separated by a comma (1, 3, 4, 6
etc) or a range of channels (1-13, 24-14
etc).

For example, if you wanted the channels

ordered backwards on a 24-channel
system, you would enter 24-1. If you
wished to reverse the order of channels 1-
12 in a 24 channel system, you would type
12-1, 13-24. Other examples are shown opposite, and are available by pressing the See Examples
button on the remapping menu.

150
3.7.11.11 Sounds

The Geode/NZ system has several sounds to alert the

operator of the progress of his survey. These sounds can
be changed or defeated, if required.

The dialog
box opposite
shows the situations in which sounds are generated.
Options can be defeated or reselected by clicking on
the menu item.

3.7.11.12 Advanced System Options

You may need to take advantage of some advanced

system settings if you are undertaking specialized
surveys that require continuous recording or very
high sample rates.

3.7.11.12.1 Enable ADC High Pass Filter

Uncheck this option if you have modified your
Geode hardware for low-frequency option (either 0.6
Hz low cut or DC operation). Note that there may be
implications for testing your system with Geometrics
internal or external testing hardware.

3.7.11.12.2 Enable Subsample Trigger

Synchronization

This option shifts the data stream to ensure that trigger accuracy of 1/32 of a sample interval is
obtained. This is particularly important when data are to be stacked as it ensures excellent
synchronization of the trigger. If you required exact synchronization to a GPS trigger during
continuous recording, the box should be checked.

3.7.11.12.3 Enable Continuous Acquisition

Allows Geode or NZ to record data continuously. See section 7 for additional settings that
accompany continuous acquisition

151
3.7.11.13 Version Number

Selecting Version Number displays the above

window. When reporting software problems,
please be able to supply the software version
number.

3.7.11.13.1 Changing registered options.

There is also the ability under the Version Number

menu to add or remove additional software options that
you may have purchased. In this menu you can also
view the options that come standard with each package
and any existing options you have already purchased.

3.7.11.14 Close Controller

Close Controller will close the seismic

controller software. If you are operating from a
separate PC or laptop, it will return you to the
desktop. If you are using the NZ, it will shut
down Windows.

If you are operating remote power up/down

Geodes from your laptop and wish to shut the
entire line down and turn off the power, you
should first place the toggle switch on your
network interface box to the Enable Power Down position.

Enable Enable Battery

Power Power Test
Up Down

If you fail to place the toggle switch in the Enable Power Down position, all Geodes and boards
will shut down, but the first board in the line will be left powered up, draining power from the

152
battery if left overnight. You can rectify this problem without restarting the controller by simply
disconnecting the battery momentarily.

If you have Geodes connected directly to an NZ/C II-IVor NZC controller without the network
interface box, shutdown of all Geodes, including the first one, will be automatic.

153
3.8 The Geometry Graphical User Interface

The Geometry GUI provides a graphical representation of your survey, along with a wide range
of control capability. It is particularly useful when conducting reflection surveys, but can be
useful in a wide range of applications. It summarizes, in one simple view, the physical positions
and other attributes of the hardware on the ground, and allows graphical control of these.

3.8.1 Visual Attributes

Below is a typical display of a 96-channel, four-Geode layout. We will first describe the display
itself, and follow with a description of its control capabilities.

The information in the display above is summarized below. Where appropriate, the actual
setting, as shown above, is shown in brackets for reference.

Scale (x1 shows entire spread, ranges to x100 –

this is also a drop-down menu).

[Green] Active (data) channel. Triangle

pointing down indicates low gain, up indicates
high gain.

[Grey] Inactive (data) channel (low gain, high

gain).

[Maroon] Aux channel (low gain, high gain).

[Violet] Pilot channel (low gain, high gain).

[Light green/dark green] Active channel (low

gain, high gain, frozen).

154
 [Grey/blue] Inactive channel (low gain, high
gain, frozen).

[Maroon/blue] Aux channel (low gain, high

gain, frozen).

[Violet/blue] Pilot channel (low gain, high gain,

frozen).

Geode module (active/inactive/warning/error,

with number of channels indicated).

13.9V 10.9V 9.9V

Battery (good/low/bad, with voltage indicated).

Shot location (double-click to change icon, drag

to desired location)

PC controller location (double-click to change

icon, drag to desired location).

Flag marking beginning or end of spread or

beginning or end of active portion of spread.
Labeled with shot offset (top) and flag location
(bottom). (double-click to change flag style).

Trigger cable (orange)

Geophone (analog) cable (black).

Network (digital) cable (blue).

155
SHOT LOC [162.00]: The shot location is indicated by the position of the yellow truck and is
labeled in red. The red line is the trigger cable and indicates which Geode you have plugged the
trigger into (master Geode).

OFFSET [62, 108, 578, 888]: The beginning and end locations of the spread, along with the
beginning and end locations of the active portion of the spread, are indicated by a flag. The
distance between the shot and the flag, or shot offset, is shown immediately above the flag.

LOCATION [100, 270, 740, 1050]: The location of each flag is indicated immediately below the
flag.

TRACE # [1,2,3…96]: The trace number represents the position of the trace in the shot record,
from 1 to n, where n is the number of channels. This number will always increase from left to
right. Trace numbers corresponding to flags are shown in red.

CHANNEL #:The channel number indicates the physical channel number within the Geode
module. With most systems, no distinction is made between the channel number and the trace
number. However, as we will see later, the StrataVisor/Geode allows you to map the channels
any way you wish via software to accommodate any geophone cable configuration. If no channel
mapping is done, the trace number and the channel number will be the same. Generally, the
channel number need not be displayed, but it can be useful in the initial mapping of your channels
if this is necessary. Channel numbers corresponding to flags are shown in red.

CHANNEL #: The second channel number label refers to and is in line with the channel numbers
on the Geode modules, and represents the channels that they are connected to.

GEODE # [G2, G1, G1, G2]: Each Geode on each network line is numbered automatically.
The Geode closest to the controller, vis-à-vis network topology, is always Geode number 1. In
the above example, we have two separate networks, so there are two each of G1 and G2.

BATTERY LVL [13.9, 13.8, 13.9, 13.8]: This indicates the battery level for the Geode.

LINE # [L1, L2]: In the case of more than one network line, as above, the Geode software will
automatically assign one to be Line 1 and the other to be Line 2. This assignment is arbitrary but
consistent: the designation of the network ports on your PC will be the same with each session.

PC LOCATION (see above) [660.00]: This shows the location of the PC controller. For
convenience only.

3.8.2 Control Functions

Various survey parameters can be controlled via the Geometry GUI. Right-clicking the mouse
will bring up different menus, depending on where your pointer is at the time.

3.8.2.1 Shot location

Right-clicking on the shot icon will display the following menu:

156
Choose “Enter Shot Location” to display the Geometry menu and type in the shot location:

Enabling the “Set Shot Location at Mouse Cursor Location” toggle switch allows you to set the
shot location by simply pointing and clicking at the location you wish to move the shot to.

Note: At any time, you may click and drag the shot icon to the desired location.

Finally, clicking on “Select Next Shot Location Symbol” will change the icon used to indicate the
shot. For instance, to say screen space, you may choose to use a simple asterisk:

157
Note: Double-clicking on the shot icon will cycle through the various choices.

3.8.2.2 Geometry Tool Bar Display Setting

Right clicking on the white portion of the display will reveal the following menu:

The first eleven choices in the above menu are discussed elsewhere in this manual. Choosing any
one of them directs you to the appropriate menu or, in the case of channel roll, takes the specified
action. Click on any item to review: Group Interval, Group/Shot Locations, Phone Increment,
Shot Increment, Gap, Channels Auto Roll, Roll Channels Up, Roll Channels Down, Freeze
Channels, Specify Channels, Channel Remapping.

You may choose which information to display on the Geometry GUI by clicking on “Geometry
Tool Bar Display Setting”, which will reveal the follow menu:

158
Using the above menu, you may de-select items to simplify the GUI and save screen space.

3.8.2.3 Select Geophone Cable Type

For purposes of display, and for mapping channels correctly, there are three basic cable types.
In order for the geometry display to match what you have on the ground, you must indicate what
kind of cable you have. Click on “Select Geophone Cable Type” to display the following menu:

159
A “high end” cable means that channel 1 is connected to the furthest geophone from the Geode
module:

A “low end” cable means that channel 1 is connected to the closest geophone to the Geode
module:

“A split spread” cable consists of two cables, with the Geode in the middle:

160
Choose “mixed” geophone cable if you have a combination of those described above, and your
survey layout will be displayed as follows:

3.8.2.4 Zoom

Click on “Zoom” to display the choices of scale, and choose the desired scale. Note that you can
control the scale with the zoom selection box in the upper left hand corner of the Geometry GUI,
as discussed in Section 4.8.1. However, it is included in this menu in the event you choose not to
display zoom selection box.

Note: You may also control the scale by highlighting the zoom control box and using the left and
right arrow keys. Also, the “Page Up” key will set the zoom to x1, and the “Page Down” key will
set the zoom to x100.

161
Note: A zoom setting of x1 will result in the entire survey layout fitting within the visible portion
of the GUI.

3.8.2.5 Dock

The Geometry GUI is a “dockable” toolbar. Generally, it is “docked” or “fastened” to the bottom
of the display. However, if you would like to move it to another location, you can “undock” it
and move it around like any other window. You may close it by clicking on the “X” in the upper
right-hand corner. To bring it back, open the Window menu, and click on “View Geometry Tool
Bar”.

Note: Since the Geometry GUI is a toolbar rather than a window, it will always be on top.

3.8.2.6 Geode Status

Right-clicking on a Geode module will display the following menu:

162
This is the same as “Configuration Status” in the system menu.

3.8.2.7 Ping Geode

If you have remote power-up Geodes, you may “ping” it – it will emit a high-pitched beep for 15
seconds. This can be useful when troubleshooting the line.

3.8.2.8 Set Geode as Master Trigger

You may set any Geode to be the master trigger Geode. The trigger line (red) will connect the
source to the master Geode.

3.8.2.9 Select Geophone Cable Type

This is covered above in Section 4.8.4.

3.8.2.10 Disable Data Channel

Right-clicking on a geophone symbol(s) will reveal the following menu:

If the channel is not an aux or pilot channel, clicking on “Disable Data Channel (Not Pilot or
Aux) will make that channel inactive. Changing channel attributes is also discussed in Section
4.7.4.5.

3.8.2.11 Enable Channel

If a channel is currently inactive, clicking on “Enable Channel” will activate that channel as a
data channel.

3.8.2.12 Set Channel to High Gain

The Geode/NZ normally ships in a configuration giving you the choice of selecting the lower or
higher of two analog gains (12/24 dB or 24/36 dB). Choosing “Set Channel to High Gain” will
set that channel to the higher of the two.

163
3.8.2.13 Set Channel to Low Gain

Similar to above, choosing this option will set the channel to the lower gain of the two.

3.8.2.14 Scrolling

If you set the zoom factor to a number larger than one, you may scroll the image left and right.
There are three ways to scroll. You may:

1) Use the scroll bar.

2) You may highlight the scroll bar and then use the left and right arrow key.

3) You may place the pointer at the right or left edge of the display. An arrow will
appear (see below), and the display will scroll with each click of the mouse. This
is particularly useful if you have elected not to display the scroll bar.

3.8.2.15 Selecting Multiple Channels

The same operations performed on individual channels as discussed in Sections 4.8.2.10-13 can
also be performed on groups of channels. You may select a group of channels or geophones by
using your mouse to draw a box around them:

164
The will be highlighted, as shown below:

If you wish to highlight non-contiguous channels, hold the CTRL button down and click on the
desired channels:

If you wish to highlight several non-contiguous groups of contiguous channels, hold the CTRL
key down and draw boxes around those you wish to highlight:

In short, holding the CTRL key down allows you to select/deselect a channel or group of
channels without affecting the status of the other channels. Experiment with the channel
selection function to get a feel for how it works.

Once you have selected your channels, simply right-click to display the following menu:

165
You may then change the gain or status of the entire set of selected channels as discussed in
Sections 4.8.2.10-13

3.8.2.16 Tool Tips

There is not enough room to display the geophone or trace number or its location for every
geophone group. To display the information for a particular group, place your pointer on the
geophone symbol, as shown below.

3.8.2.17 Channel Remapping Assistance

Channel remapping is discussed in Section 4.7.11.10. This can be a somewhat confusing subject,
but it is greatly simplified by the Geometry GUI. The key is to choose the remapping
parameters and cable types that result in the graphical representation of your survey matching
what you have on the ground.

This is best illustrated by example. Consider the following 96-channel, two-network line Geode
system.

The channels have not been remapped; everything is set to default values (note that the trace
number and the channel number is the same for all geophones). The geophone cables are set to
the standard “high-side” configuration. If your cables are “high side”, then if you connect
everything up as shown above, your traces/channels will be in the proper order -- if you set off a
shot to the left of the spread, traveltimes will increase to the right, as shown below.

166
However, let’s assume your cables are not Geometrics “standard”, but are “low-side” cables.
This means that the lowest channel number is closest to the Geode module, which is the opposite
of that shown above. In this case, if we set off a shot at the left end of the spread as laid out
above, our first break times would look like the following:

The Geodes are in the proper order, but each one is flipped. To rectify this, we must do two
things: 1) change the geophone cable setting in the Geometry GUI to “low side” cables, after
which our Geometry graphic will appear as below, and 2) plug each Geode into the opposite end
of the cable.

The second step is crucial: what is on the ground must match what is on shown on the geometry
graphic.

167
Compare to the previous geometry graphic; note that it is now the low-numbered channel of each
cable that is plugged into each Geode. If you connect everything up as shown here, your shot
record should be correctly mapped.

In the above configuration, one would probably find it more convenient to place the controller PC
in the middle of the Geode spread and connect the networks to the two nearest Geodes, as shown
below. This would require less network cable than the configuration shown above.

As before, if you make this change on the ground, you must also make the change in the channel
remapping module. In this case, we simply reverse the Geode order in network line 1:

Compare to the previous configuration and you will see that Geode 1 and Geode 2 have been
interchanged.

168
To make this a little more understandable, it is instructive to show what your shot record would
look like if you made the change on the ground, but did not remap the channels such that the
geometry GUI matched the field layout:

Again: The system is designed so that if you make the geometry GUI match what you have on the
ground, the channels will be mapped correctly.

169
4 Hardware and Accessories
4.1 Equipment and Accessories for Operation

It takes several peripheral accessories to conduct a seismic survey. Besides the seismograph, you
will need a power source, geophone cables, geophones, an energy source, plus a few minor items.
Specific items vary considerably depending on the survey. Because of the potential variations,
only a minimum of the required accessories are supplied with the basic instrument. The
remaining accessories may have been ordered with your system as options, or you may have
intended to supply your own. Most seismographs have a high degree of interchangability in
accessories (particularly geophones and cables), and you may be using equipment you already
own. The shipping documents should be checked to confirm the items supplied as standard
equipment and those ordered as optional accessories. Geometrics has applications specialists on
staff to help tailor your survey instrumentation.

4.1.1 PC Requirements
4.1.1.1 Memory Requirements

If you are using a laptop or PC for the Geode control device, some specifications are
recommended. The memory requirements for seismic data are significant and in the following
guidelines, we have been conservative.

Small systems of 24 channels with short memory will run in 64 Mb of RAM, but may be slow. IN
general, 256 Mb should be considered standard, whereas large systems of 240 channels and above
run best with 1024 Mb of RAM.

4.1.1.2 CPU Requirements

As in most scientific applications these days, faster is better. Although we have run small systems
on Pentium 90’s running 64 Mb of RAM, we recommend a minimum of a 233 PII with memory
as specified above. If you are writing tape, a processor of 1 GHz or faster is recommended.

4.1.2 Power

The StrataVisor and GeodeTM portable systems operate from a nominal 12 volts DC. This may
be a rechargeable battery pack, a standard automotive battery, 12-volt vehicle power, or an
AC-powered, 12-volt DC supply. Current drain of the StrataVisor NZ varies depending on the
number of channels and the options installed. The small systems draw about 8 amps, increasing
with the number of channels and installed options to nearly 20 amps for the largest systems.
Additional power is required for short intervals when the printer is running. The power source
selected should be sufficient for a day in the field.

170
Geodes are much lower power devices and use approximately 0.6 W (0.05W) per channel. A 10
amp hour battery should run the Geode for several hours, enough for a single day survey. If you
are using the correlator continuously in a high production vibrator survey, a 15 amp-hour battery
is more suitable. For cold weather operation, a 15-20 amp-hour battery is recommended. Geodes
run in a lower power mode when the seismic controller software is not running. Remote power up
Geodes are capable of powering off when idle, reducing power consumption to almost zero.

A general purpose power cord with clip connectors is provided with each system. Connect the
seismograph to the power source tightly as momentary loss of power will cause the loss of any
data in memory and possibly interfere with disk operations.

Optional rechargeable gel-cell batteries are available from Geometrics. Battery packs are supplied
with an appropriate power cord to connect to the power receptacle plug on the seismograph. Also
available with the rechargeable battery is a 110/220 volt AC-powered battery charger. Before
using this charger, check and see that the proper AC voltage is selected on the switch. The
Geometrics charger is designed to be connected continuously to the battery. The system will
charge at a high rate until the battery is charged, then switch to a standby voltage. A light on the
charger indicates when the rate switches to trickle charge, which also means the battery is
charged. Charging will take several hours.

4.1.3 Blink Codes

The blue LED’s that are on the side of the StrataVisor NZ and Geode have several modes which
convey information about the device’s status.

Power LED Blink Mode Meaning

Not Blinking Not connected or power not on
Every 3 seconds Standby Mode
Rapid (every .1 sec for 1 second) Download code and reset
Every 7 seconds On line, communicating data and instructions
Every 0.5 seconds for 15 seconds Can be blinked manually from the
SYSTEM/CONFIGURATION STATUS menu. Note
that you must select the first board in each Geode for the
power LED to flash.

Ethernet LED Blink Mode Meaning

Not Blinking Not connected or not functioning
Every 3 seconds Detects Neighbor / in Low Power Standby Mode
Every 7 seconds On line, communicating data and instructions

4.1.4 Connecting Geodes To Your Laptop Or StrataVisor NZ

4.1.4.1 Digital Interface Adapters (network adapters)

As discussed in earlier chapters , Geodes can be connected to your laptop, to a PC or to a

StrataVisor NZ – essentially any PC device that has a functional, industry standard Ethernet port.
In standard Category 5 (CAT5) cable that is used for Ethernet data transmission, there are 4 pairs
of wires, but only two are used for actual data transmission. Geometrics uses the other two pair of

171
wires for synchronous triggering of all A/D cards and to allow remote power up/down for Geode
distributed modules.

Geometrics provides Network Interface Boxes (NIB) to connect Ethernet adapters in your PC or
laptop to Geode modules. However, since the extra pairs or wires used for triggering or remote
start must be used appropriately, Geometrics offers different NIB solutions depending on your
application.

For a single line of Geode distributed modules connected to a LAPTOP use NIB adapter P/N
0028102-01. This adapter the wires for remote start and trigger disabled so they will not
damage the PCMCIA connector in your laptop. This adapter should also be used with a
PC network card.

RJ45
Adapter

For two Geode lines, use NIB adapter P/N 0028102-02 Cable Adapter. Trigger and remote start
disabled back to the laptop but the trigger wires passed between lines.

RJ45 - 1

RJ45 - 2
Adapter

For a single Geode line connected to a StrataVisor NZ via the external RJ-45 connector, use NIB
adapter P/N 0028102-03. This NIB has the trigger cable brought out from the internal A/D cards
in case the trigger is initiated on the NZ trigger connector. These NZ’s are an older design;
modern NZ2’s have the ruggedized Ethernet connector built directly on the side and no separate
box is required.

RJ4
Adapter

The NIB’s will soon be available with a toggle switch used in conjunction with the seismic
software to start and shut down remote power up Geodes. Single line NIBs are part number
28102-04 and dual line NIBs are part number 28102-05. The toggle switch has 3 positions
• Enable power up: powers up first board in the line so that starting the seismic controller
software will power up the entire line

172
 • Enable power down: prepares the line for power down prior to shutting down seismic
controller software
• Battery Test: evaluates the charge on the 9V battery inside the NIB.

Enable Enable Battery

Power Up Power Test
Down

4.1.4.2 Digital Cable Considerations

Geode digital interface cables are available as either lightweight, or with an abrasion resistant
coating. Maximum digital cable lengths are as follows:
o 250 m length between Geodes
o 250 m between the first Geode and an NZ with internal channels on the same line
o 100 m between network connections on NZ’s with no channels
o 100 m between the first Geode(s) and an NZC
o 100m between a laptop and the first Geode

173
4.1.5 Interfacing the StrataVisor NZ to External Devices
4.1.5.1 Connecting Internal PC to an External Network

4.1.5.1.1 Old Style NZ with RJ45 external connector

Close the StrataVisor NZ program if it is running.

Open the display panel and look in the area to the right behind the floppy drive. There is
a label “NET”. Look just below the label and there will be an RJ45 plug and connector.
The plug and gray cable go to the acquisition cards. Remove the plug and use the RJ45
socket for you network connection to another computer. Use a crossover cable to make
the connection to the laptop or other computer. Use a straight cable for plugging into a
system network connection (a hub connection for instance).

Display cover

Acquisition Gray cable

And RJ45 plug

Floppy

To remove the external network connection, reverse the process by unplugging the
network cable. Plug the gray cable (from the acquisition cards) back into the socket
marked “NET”.

174
4.1.5.1.2 NZII systems with multiple external network ports

You can Ethernet port 2-4 to access the internal PC directly.

4.1.5.2 Setting up Network Protocol On NZ Internal PC

WARNING: Geometrics currently recommends against using TCPIP protocol.

This procedure below allows connecting between your laptop and StrataVisor NZ
using “NetBEUI Protocol”.

You should connect crossover CAT5 cable between laptop and NZ using the
procedure above.

Setup for StrataVisor NZ

1. Close NZ program by pressing <Alt>&F4 together.
2. If you don’t know how to connect net cable, follow a document “How to connect to an
external network”.
3. From the DESKTOP menu, select “Start”, “Program”, and “Windows NT Explorer”
4. Scroll down to your data file folder and right click it. Click on “Sharing”.
5. Select “Shared As” and click “ok”.

Setup for your laptop and connection with StrataVisor NZ

1. From the DESKTOP menu, select “Start”, “Program”, and “Control Panel”.
2. Double click on “Network” and go to “Protocols” tap menu.
3. Make sure you have a “NetBEUI Protocol”. If not, add it.
4. Choose “Adapters” tap menu and click on “Properties” of your Ethernet Adapter.
5. If everything is done, click “ok” or “cancel” depending on your change. You may
reboot your laptop.
6. From DESKTOP, double click on “Network Neighborhood” icon.
7. Click on “Controller”. This is a StrataVisor NZ.
8. Now you can see your data file folder.

Caution: Some customers have experienced occasional system hangs using TCPIP
protocol on the StrataVisor NZ seismograph. We believe we have this issue resolved,
but recommend vigilance.

4.1.5.3 Integrating Two StrataVisor NZ Computers for Use as One

System

It is possible to control the acquisition channels of one NZ with another StrataVisor NZ.
This process is called ‘master/slaving (m/s)’ two NZ instrument together and is
described below:

4.1.5.3.1 Configuring the Slave

This requires opening the display panel. Look in the area to the right behind the floppy
drive. There is a label “NET”. Look just below the label and there will be an RJ45 plug

175
and connector. This gray cable goes to the acquisition cards. Remove the plug and use
an RJ45 female to female crossover socket to adapt a network cable that will go to
another NZ or Geode output. You can also use a crossover cable and two RJ45 female to
female sockets. See Geometrics for an adapter cable that converts the Geode Ethernet
connection to an RJ45 plug.

Gray cable and RJ45 plug

provides connection to output
side of acquisition cards.

RJ45 Female to Female

Crossover adapter (or straight
through adapter with a
crossover CABLE)

This cable connects to either

another NZ that will act as a
master, or to the end of a line of
Geodes. The cable shown here has
a Geode connector, but could be
an RJ45 if connecting to an NZ.

4.1.5.3.2 Configuring the Master NZ

176
At this point you should connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the input
acquisition connector on the master NZ . The master NZ may have either an RJ45, or a
MIL-C-10544 connector its side.

Power up both NZ systems. The master NZ should automatically detect the additional
boards on the slave StrataVisor NZ, as well as all of its own internal channels. Check to
see that this is the case using the SYSTEM/CONFIGURATION STATUS menu item.

4.1.5.4 Connecting a StrataVisor NZ to the end of a string of Geodes

You can connect the acquisition channels in an NZ to up to 4 lines of Geodes to add additional
channels. Power down the controller for the Geodes and the NZ to be used as a slave. Follow the
procedure above to prepare the NZ as a slave. Connect the cable to the NZ acquisition channels to
the input connector on the last Geode in the line (annotated by a connector with an ARROW
pointing INTO a circle). Restart the Geode controller. All acquisition channels should be
automatically detected. . Check to see that this is the case using the
SYSTEM/CONFIGURATION.

Modern NZs have either two or four ruggedized network controllers for connecting upto four
lines of Geodes. Older NZs have one RJ-45 network connection. Note that the distance between
the network connection on the end of a line of internal Geodes and the first Geode on that line can
be 250 m. If there are no internal channels on a network line, the distance is limited to 100m
between the NZ or NZC and the first Geode.

177
4.1.6 The Energy Source
“Energy source”, when used in a seismic context, means a source of seismic energy; something to
introduce elastic waves into the ground. There must be a means of synchronizing the energy
source with the seismograph, or more specifically, triggering the seismograph when the energy
source is activated. Energy sources come in a wide variety of explosive and mechanical types.

A sledgehammer is the most common energy source for shallow surveys. It is popular because it
is lightweight, portable, low cost, repeatable, and safe. Its only serious limitation is its limited
depth range, although it compares favorably in this respect with a number of less portable and
more costly devices. Signal enhancement, or stacking seismographs (including the Geode and
StrataVisor) were developed for use with a sledgehammer. The energy from several hammer
blows may be stacked into memory to increase the survey depth range.

The sledgehammer is synchronized with the seismograph by an impact-sensitive "hammer

switch", taped to the handle and connected directly to the trigger connector on the seismograph.
An extension cable may be used to allow the sledgehammer to be located away from the
seismograph. An aluminum or steel plate (approximately the same weight as the hammer) is
placed on the ground for the hammer to impact. This "striker plate" provides more efficient
coupling and more precise triggering.

Explosives, such as dynamite and its derivatives, are an excellent and widely used energy source.
Optional blasters, such as the Geometrics HVB-1, are available with the StrataVisor. The
blaster provides a high voltage to detonate the blasting cap and also sends a signal to trigger the
seismograph at "zero time".

Other sources which may be used with the Geode and StrataVisor include weight drops,
shotgun-type devices (such as the "Betsy" seisgun), electro-mechanical sources, vibrators, air
guns, and most other types of seismic energy sources which can be synchronized in some manner
with the Geode and StrataVisor. There are a number of ways to synchronize an energy source:

a) If the source operates with a sharp impact, the standard hammer switch can be used
(examples: sledgehammer, shotgun, accelerated weight drop, land air gun).

b) If the source is activated with electrical energy, the seismograph can usually be synchronized
with the same electrical device (examples: blasting caps, electric shotgun shells, sparker,
boomer, piezoelectric transducer). Some devices have an imprecise mechanical delay and
may require a device to sense the actual vibration and provide an analog record (examples:
marine or borehole air guns, water gun). In that case, the vibration sensor should be
connected to one of the signal channels. Set the seismograph delay to a negative number to
record a short portion of the record prior to the trigger. This will allow recording of the
whole signature from the sensor to verify and correct for exact zero time.

c) Some sources can be synchronized by placing a standard geophone (connected to the

seismograph trigger input) near the source (examples: weight drop, explosives using a
blaster without a trigger signal, explosives with chemical fuses). Obviously any source may
be synchronized with this method, but the timing may be a little less precise. Since the
geophone will not be located at exactly the point of impact, there will be some delay
between the impact time and the trigger. Try and keep this delay (distance) constant.

178
d) If you find yourself with a broken hammer switch or in need of even higher trigger accuracy
than the hammer switch can provide, you can trigger on a contact closure by taping one
trigger wire lead to the hammer head and the other to the striker plate. A contact closure
(which is exactly what the hammer switch provides) will occur when the hammer strikes the
plate, and this will cause the seismograph to trigger.

Remember that the seismograph can be triggered by a contact open as well as a closure. If you
have an explosive with an imprecise detonation time (such as firecrackers or "zero delay" blasting
caps), the seismograph can be triggered by wrapping a small wire around the explosive device
(connected to the start input on the seismograph). It will break contact at the time of detonation.
If you use this method, it is recommended that you set the system to Manual Arm mode, so that
the system automatically disarms itself immediately after the charge goes off. Otherwise you
may get false triggers after the initial detonation, as the trigger wire leads may come in contact
with each other.

179
4.1.7 Geophone Cables
A geophone cable is a multi-conductor cable with connectors molded at intervals along the cable.
The geophones will have connectors which mate with those on the cable. One common type is the
wire-wrap takeout, which looks like a coil spring molded into the cable. The mating connector
used on the geophone is a clip with a colored insulator. The takeouts and clips are different
widths and colors to encourage the use of the same polarity each time the geophone is connected.

Waterproof connectors are also available from the geophone and cable manufacturers. These are
preferred in wet locations despite their higher cost and complexity.

4.1.7.1 Cables for Refraction Surveys

Geometrics recommends the use of refraction geophone spread cables terminated with rugged,
waterproof connections. We have chosen the Bendix 61 pin connector (PT06-24-61S(SR),
Geometrics Part Number 21-206-070) after using it for years on our larger systems and find it
suitable for most demanding field applications. With the Bendix connector, you can bring as
many as 30 channels per cable back to the seismograph and a single cable can be often used for
the entire spread length. Very long cables can be broken up into appropriate lengths for transport
using additional connectors.

The StrataVisor NZ is available with either the Bendix connector or with the older style Cannon
12 channel connector. The Bendix is the only connector available on the Geode as it is designed
to be waterproof.

Geometrics Geode seismographs are typically wired as ‘high-side’ devices, meaning that the
Geodes are positioned close to the highest number channel that they are connected to. If you are
more comfortable located close to the lower numbered channel, you can either
• simply move your laptop or control device close to the lower channel using a long network
cable and leave the Geode at the end of the line
• use the channel remapping feature in the SYSTEM menu to reverse the order of the channels
on the cable

Customers that wish to use their older style refraction cables can purchase a short adapter to mate
with the Geode seismograph. These older cables typically have 12 takeouts and are terminated
with 27-pin connectors (Cannon type NK-27-21C). These cables are usually "double-ended",
constructed so they are reversible and identical from either end.

If you are using a single cable with a Cannon NK27 style connector you will need adapter PN
28545-01 available from Geometrics. If your Geode has 24 channels and you have two of the
older style cable and wish to position them on either side of the seismograph in the ‘split-spread’
configuration so that no jumper cables are required, you will need a Y adapter, PN 28544-01.

180
The StrataVisor NZ seismograph uses either the NK-27 style connectors or the Bendix 61 pin
connectors. Typical wiring configurations for the StrataVisor NZ are shown in the following
tables. Consult the factory when connecting peripheral devices to ensure compatibility.

4.1.7.2 Cables for Reflection Surveys

Reflection surveys differ in that continuous, overlapping surveys are usually conducted along a
line. The data is processed on a computer to produce an uninterrupted cross section. In shallow
exploration, these surveys fall into two types: common offset gathers (COG, or "Optimum
Window") and common midpoint surveys (also called CMP, common depth point or CDP
surveys).

Standard refraction cables are used for "optimum window" or "common offset gather" reflection
surveys.

CDP surveys are a little more complex. Shots are fired along a line by moving the shotpoint and
active portion of the geophone spread just a short distance each time. Rather than physically
moving the geophones and cables each time, two, three, or four 12-takeout refraction cables, or a
special cable (called a CDP cable) is used.

A roll switch may be required for CDP survey using the StrataVisor NZ with a large (>12)
number of internal channels. A roll switch is a multi-input, multi-channel switch that can select a
group of geophones from a longer array, and then move that active group along the ground by
electrically adding new geophones on one end and dropping geophones off the other end as the
energy source is moved along the ground. The output cable of the roll switch will need the
appropriate connectors to mate with the input connector on the seismograph.

The Geode is more flexible than traditional seismographs that require roll boxes and CDP cables.
Because each Geode can be deployed directly on the line and separated by long distances by
noiseless digital cable, simple and inexpensive refraction cable can be used for either refraction or
reflection surveys. The rolling function that is accomplished by a hardware roll box in traditional
systems can now be easily duplicated in software turning on or off channels as necessary. The
figure below shows Geodes on a long reflection line.

The geophone cables connected to each Geode are short so that signal quality is not degraded by
transmitting small analog signals over long distances. Signals are digitized in each box and
transmitted back to a central location by digital cable.

181
The Geode allows highly flexible field geometries to permit collection of data with two- or three-
dimensional arrays.

4.1.8 Geophones
The moving-coil geophone is the basic vibration sensor. The coil and its support spring make a
pendulum with a natural frequency, and this is specified for all geophones. Frequency is
measured in cycles-per-second, called Hertz and abbreviated Hz. The output of the geophone is
reasonably flat in responding to earth vibrations with a frequency higher than the natural
frequency of the geophone. The geophone is less sensitive to vibrations with frequencies lower
than its natural frequency. The sensitivity decreases (or rolls off) at -12 dB/octave below the
natural frequency. Thus, for a 40-Hz geophone, the sensitivity at 20 Hz will be 1/4 the sensitivity
at 40 Hz. Geophone manufacturers provide data sheets with response curves for each type of
geophone.

The geophone is a pendulum, and left to its own devices will oscillate at its natural frequency.
Internal friction will damp these oscillations somewhat, but additional damping is normally
required. The published data sheets show the response curves with various levels of damping (the
oscillation is shown as a peak near the natural frequency). A geophone is damped by connecting a
resistor across its output terminals; the preferred resistor values are shown on the data sheet.
Some seismographs have an input circuit with a low resistance, and geophones purchased for
such instruments may not have damping resistors installed. The StrataVisor and GeodeTM have
a relatively high input resistance (20,000 ohms) and geophones purchased for use with the
StrataVisor should be ordered from the manufacturer with the damping resistor installed (these
can also be added later by soldering the proper value low-noise resistor across the terminals). An
incorrectly damped geophone is not a disaster, the result is a boosted signal near the natural
frequency, but proper damping is good practice. A properly damped geophone will have a lower
output voltage because the resistor attenuates the signal.

The desired seismic information is generally called "signal". Undesirable vibrations (from wind,
vehicle traffic, airplanes, surface waves, machinery) are called "noise". Improving the
signal-to-noise ratio is an ongoing effort in seismic exploration. Geophone frequencies are
chosen to provide adequate signals at the frequencies found in the seismic data, and preferably
not at the frequencies of the noise signals (where the two are different).

Much noise tends to be low frequency (because low-frequency vibrations travel further through
the ground). For shallow surveys, seismic signals tend to have a much higher frequency and a
geophone with a natural frequency around 14 Hz is a good compromise.

In shallow reflection surveys, most of the problems come from large, low-frequency surface
waves. Thus, it has been common to use 100-Hz geophones to filter the surface waves.
Obviously, having a wide selection of geophones available is not only inconvenient, it is quite
costly. The StrataVisor seismograph, with its high dynamic range, can compensate for most of
these problems and you can normally compromise on one good set of 14-Hz to 40-Hz wideband
geophones. The seismograph's selectable lowcut filters can quickly be set in the field to the best
frequency to fit the situation. Furthermore, with its 24-bit A/D converter, the StrataVisor /
GeodeTM will record data with sufficient resolution that digital filtering can be used later to
extract signals from noise. Guidelines and compromises that were appropriate to 8-bit refraction
seismographs do not apply to the StrataVisor.

182
Geophone groups are sometimes used for reflection surveys. A group is a collection of
geophones, wired together in series and/or parallel, connected to a single channel on the
seismograph. They are spread out on the ground in an array chosen to attenuate surface waves
and reinforce waves arriving vertically. Geophone groups are widely used for deep reflection
surveys but are less desirable for shallow reflection surveys. The wavelengths of the surface
waves in shallow surveys are too long for practical spatial filtering with geophone groups,
although using 2 or 3 phones in a small group can attenuate the effects of the sound of the shot
detonating.

183
4.2 The StrataVisor NZ Seismograph

Specifications of the StrataVisor NZ are described in Appendix A. Operation was discussed in

Chapters 1 and 2. This section is intended to provide background information on the
StrataVisor seismograph, as well as specific hardware details. There are several evolutions of
the NZ product line:
1. NZ: first model, PI processor, external RJ45 network connector to Geodes, one
line only
2. NZC: PI processor, MIL connectors on side for Geodes, no acquisition connectors
3. NZ II: PI processor, 2 or 4 MIL connectors on side for Geodes, built-in acquisition
channels
4. NZ IV (future): PIII processor

4.2.1 Display
The StrataVisorTM NZ comes standard with a color liquid crystal display (LCD). Tthere are no
contrast controls. The color display is generally not effected by thermal heating from the sun,
but it is still good practice to keep it shaded from the hot sun.

4.2.1.1 Display Fall Asleep Mode Switch (Power Save)

To save power, the LCD display will ‘fall asleep’ after a 2 minutes of operation. Simply press any
key and the display will turn back on again. An internal switch on the inside of the panel allows
you to defeat this feature.

4.2.1.2 Changing Screen Resolution for External Devices

If you want to increase the resolution of an external display above the 800x600 resolution of the
LCD display you must turn off the LCD display. This is done in the "Control Panel" under
"Display" and "Chips" tab. The choices are "CRT", "LCD", and "Both". Normally the Both is
selected. To increase the resolution you must check CRT. Next click OK and system will go to
the desktop. Now go back into the "Control Panel" and go to "Display Settings". Change the
resolution bar to the resolution you want for the CRT. The LCD panel will be clear and back lit.
To restore the LCD go back to the Chips tab and select Both. The resolution of the CRT will not
be 800X600, but will default to 600X480 (This condition is not valid and the CRT controller is in
an undefined state). You now need to go to the Settings tab and change the resolution back to
800X600 to fix the CRT and LCD to the same resolution.

184
4.2.2 Printer
4.2.2.1 Loading Paper

To load paper into the printer in the StrataVisor NZ, tilt open the cover (released by pressing the
two latches on either side). Left the paper release lever and remove the empty reel and two plastic
end plates from the retaining guides. Insert the end plates into the new paper roll and snap the
new roll into the retaining guides. The paper roll should be oriented with the loose end between
the printer and the paper roll curled upward. Insert the loose end into the slot in the center of the
printer (see Figure adjacent),
and feed it through the rollers. Paper Supply Reel
Leave enough paper
protruding to conveniently Slot Paper Release
feed the loose end through the slot Lever
in the instrument case. Center
the paper and move the
paper release to the clamp position. Printer

Figure 5.1 - Loading paper in printer.

Print a sample record. Adjust the paper if not centered. If the plotted records are blank, then check
to see if the paper is upside down. Turn the paper supply reel over so it feeds into the printer the
proper way. These instructions are also on the inside of the instrument panel.

4.2.2.2 The Print Header

The plotted record on either the GeodeTM or NZ is annotated with a header, which includes
information about the line and the data.

The header will identify the source and status of the data. Raw unsaved data is identified as
"UNSAVED STACKED DATA". If the data has been written to disk, the message will say
"SAVED AS FILE xxxxx.DAT". Data read from a file is labeled "READ FROM FILE
xxxxx.DAT". Thus, it is good practice to make paper copies of the record after, rather than
before, saving the file to disk. Then, the copies can be matched with a particular file later.

The remaining parameters listed on the print header match similar descriptors on the display and
menu. The channel numbers and trace sizes are listed below the descriptors. Time lines are
provided at approximately 1 cm intervals, with every tenth line accented and labeled. Thus, the
physical interval between the time lines is kept at a convenient spacing for picking arrival times.

4.2.3 Data Acquisition and Sampling

All modern seismographs are digital. They operate by digitizing the amplified seismic signal with
an analog-to-digital converter. This digital signal is then stored in a semiconductor memory,
where it can be viewed on a display, plotted on a paper record, or stored on some device for later
use.

185
In digitizing, the seismic signal is broken up into different levels (or amplitudes) with a number
assigned to each level. The number of bits used by the A/D converter is the measure of the
number of levels. On older refraction seismographs, an 8-bit converter is commonly used. That
means that there are 28 or 256 different levels available. Since seismic signals are either positive
or negative, one bit is assigned to indicate the polarity, and the signal can range from -128 to
+127 levels.

A signal that is too small to make the transition between levels will not be digitized (except that
noise often will add enough random signal to make the transitions happen). The signal can also be
too large and exceed either -128 or +127. When that happens the reconstructed waves have flat
tops and are said to be "clipped" (clipping can also occur in the amplifier, or the memory of an
8-bit seismograph during stacking). This is not the same as the clipping that occurs when the
Trace Style is set to "clipped" – this is a display option and does not affect the actual data.
Generally, electronic clipping can be identified as irregularly distorted waveforms, not perfectly
flattened ones. In refraction surveys, one generally doesn't care too much about clipping, since
first breaks are all that is important. However, in surveys where the entire wave form is
important, particularly reflection surveys, clipping must be avoided (see Chapter 2 for a
discussion of clipping).

In a seismograph, the amplifier gains must be adjusted to keep the signal significantly larger than
the minimum quantization level, but less than the full-scale value. This is not a major problem in
refraction surveys, since the first arrivals are easily identified and adjustments made based on the
record appearance (although there is a tendency for new users to mistakenly identify the larger
surface waves as first arrivals).

A significant improvement of the principle difference between the StrataVisor/ GeodeTM and
previous seismographs is in the quality of the digitizer. The StrataVisor/GeodeTM have a 24-bit
A/D converter, which quantizes the signal in 224 or 16 million steps. Thus, there is extra
resolution and dynamic range to allow the system to handle large and small signals
simultaneously. Once the data is digitized, it is stored in memory in a 32-bit word. This is
transparent to the user, although it is worth noting that having this many bits ensures that you will
never saturate by stacking too many signals.

The digitizing of the signal does not take place continuously, but at regular intervals, called the
"sampling interval" or sampling rate. Practical considerations dictate that a limit be put on the
total number of samples taken. The sample rate is chosen so that the total seismic record fits
within the memory. The StrataVisor has a larger than normal memory, and the operator may
elect to not use all the memory available.

Consider a refraction line 5,000 ft (1,500 m) long. Unless the overburden is unusually deep, there
should be bedrock velocities of around 10,000 ft/sec (3,000 m/s) and the average velocity should
be above 5,000 ft/sec (1,500 m/s). Thus it will take about 1 second to travel from the shotpoint to
the last geophone. With a memory length of 4096 samples, a sample interval of 0.250
milliseconds will provide a record long enough to capture all the arrivals of interest.

Most users will find that although a 0.25 or even 0.125 ms sampling inteval provides more data
than is necessary to accurately determine the time of the first arrivals, it is an appropriate sample
rate when plotting and manually picking first arrivals on the StrataVisor printer. An
experienced user employing either the StrataVisor automated first break picking software or a

186
separate computer program would be quite happy with 1024 samples, with a sample rate selected
to put the furthest geophone's first arrival at around the midpoint of the record (0.5 ms sampling
would give you a total record length of 512 ms with 1024-sample record length). It is generally
quite easy in the field to repeat a shot, so feel free to experiment. It is important in refraction
surveys to use a sample rate fast enough to spread the first arrivals away from the first part of the
record.

Reflection surveys are different, since the important information is contained in the entire record.
A longer record may be desirable, combined with faster sample rates. A good reflection record is
likely to have the first arrivals close to the zero time on the plot, so that the refractions are hard to
precisely "pick".

One of the benefits of the StrataVisor seismograph is that the operator can afford to use a little
faster sample rate or a little longer memory than needed, save the records on disk, and then pick
the arrivals later with flexibility in the display and print scale factors. It is a measure of the
sophistication of the StrataVisor that it is actually much easier to operate than a traditional
seismograph.

4.2.4 Triggering

The StrataVisor and GeodeTM can be triggered in a variety of ways. Almost any type of signal
can be used successfully, including a contact closure, contact open, saturated NPN transistor,
logic pulse, positive voltage or negative voltage. The standard hammer switch or optional blaster
are preferred.

Any standard geophone with a suitable connector (Bendix PT06A-8-3P[SR], Geometrics part
number 21-206-003) may be used for triggering. A suitable geophone with connector installed is
available from Geometrics as part number 23197-01. The standard 91-meter (300-ft) hammer
switch extension cable (Geometrics part number 23219-01) may be used to locate the trigger
geophone away from the instrument. The sensitivity should be adjusted so that ambient vibrations
from personnel or the energy source handling do not trigger the system. Locate the geophone as
close as possible to the shot point to minimize timing errors (velocities in the near surface
material are likely to introduce delays on the order of 1 ms/ft or 3 ms/m). Be consistent with the
spacing between the geophone and shotpoint so that timing errors remain more or less constant.

When using a contact open (such as breaking a wire with an explosive), remember that making
the initial connection will trigger the seismograph if it is armed at the time, and the memory
should be cleared before firing the shot.

When interfacing external electronic devices, it is good practice to isolate the ground connection
between the StrataVisor and the external device. Connecting multiple instruments to a common
ground often leads to electrical interference, called a "ground loop". Consult the factory for
assistance if problems appear when interfacing such devices to the StrataVisor.

4.2.5 Environmental Considerations

The StrataVisor and GeodeTM are designed to operate over a wide temperature range, but these
limits may be exceeded in the field. Extra effort may be required when operating in very hot or
cold temperatures.

187
In hot weather, shield the StrataVisor system from direct sunlight. This will help keep the internal
ambient temperature lower and will extend the instrument’s temperature operating range. Do not
store disks in the sun or in closed vehicles.

In cold weather, it may be necessary to wait a few minutes while the system warms up from
internal heating. In extreme cold, the system can be mounted in an insulated box. Keep your spare
disks in a warm place so they will be ready for use when needed. In extremely cold temperatures,
it may be necessary to keep the StrataVisor powered up indoors in a warm environment. When
taking it to the field, it can be wrapped in insulating material to maintain its internal heat while
being transported to the operating site. It is generally the hard drive that will fail to operate at low
temperatures, and may take some time to spin up to operating speeds.

The portable StrataVisor is designed for use in a light rain, but only in the vertical position.
Operating in a horizontal position or in heavy wind and rain may get the interior wet and damage
the instrument. Fortunately, seismic surveys are not normally conducted in such weather; the
wind and rain noise obscure the seismic signal. Put your instrument in the vehicle or dry place if
the rain exceeds a light mist.

The GeodeTM is designed to withstand more environmentally severe conditions than the
StrataVisor NZ. The Geode requires little power, and is padded internally to withstand high shock
and vibration. Its low power consumption means that it generates little heat and can withstand
most temperatures in the direct sun. Geometrics has also been able to employ wider temperature
components in the Geode. Check the most current temperature operating specs at
www.geometrics.com or contact the factory.

The StrataVisor and GeodeTM are not designed for use in explosive atmospheres. Both the
power switch and internal relays may spark when actuated.

188
4.2.6 Connector Wiring
Two different types of connectors are typically used to input signals from the geophones. The
section following details the two configurations.

4.2.6.1 Geophone Connector

On some 12 and 24 channel StrataVisor seismographs, the inputs from the geophones connect
to a 27-pin connector manufactured by Cannon. The mating connector (used on the geophone
cables) is a Cannon NK-27-21C, Geometrics part No. 21-133-027. See the following table for the
pin assignments.

Input Wiring for Systems with Cannon NK 27 Style Connectors

3 to 12 Channels 13 to 24 Channels
Channel Pin Channel Pin
+1 23 +13 1
-1 24 -13 2
+2 21 +14 3
-2 22 -14 4
+3 19 +15 5
-3 20 -15 6
+4 17 +16 7
-4 18 -16 8
+5 15 +17 9
-5 16 -17 10
+6 13 +18 11
-6 14 -18 12
+7 11 +19 13
-7 12 -19 14
+8 9 +20 15
-8 10 -20 16
+9 7 +21 17
-9 8 -21 18
+10 5 +22 19
-10 6 -22 20
+11 3 +23 21
-11 4 -23 22
+12 1 +24 23
-12 2 -24 24
NC 25 NC 25
NC 26 NC 26
GND 27 GND 27

A geophone extension cable can be constructed with the above connector on one end and a
Cannon NK-27-22C (Geometrics part No. 21-133-037) on the other end.

189
The Geode as well as the 48 and 60-channel StrataVisor seismographs use 61-pin Bendix
connectors. The mating connector is Bendix PT06-24-61S(SR) Geometrics P/N 21-206-070 or an
equivalent connector from another manufacturer. The wiring scheme is shown below.

Geophone Connector Pin Assignments for Geode 3 to 24 Channel Systems and

For StrataVisor NZ 3-48 Channel Systems Using Bendix Style Connectors
Bendix Connector 1 Bendix Connector 2 Pin Configuration For
Cannon NK27 Adapter
Cable
Channel Pins Channel Pins Pin
1 z/AA 25 A/B 23/24
2 x/y 26 C/D 21/22
3 v/w 27 E/F 19/20
4 t/u 28 G/H 17/18
5 r/s 29 J/K 15/16
6 p/q 30 L/M 13/14
7 m/n 31 N/P 11/12
8 j/k 32 R/S 9/10
9 h/i 33 T/U 7/8
10 f/g 34 V/W 5/6
11 d/e 35 X/Y 3/4
12 b/c 36 Z/a 1/2
13 Z/a 37 b/c 1/2
14 X/Y 38 d/e 3/4
15 V/W 39 f/g 5/6
16 T/U 40 h/i 7/8
17 R/S 41 j/k 9/10
18 N/P 42 m/n 11/12
19 L/M 43 p/q 13/14
20 J/K 44 r/s 15/16
21 G/H 45 t/u 17/18
22 E/F 46 v/w 19/20
23 C/D 47 x/y 21/22
24 A/B 48 z/AA 23/24

GND PP PP 27

Notes:
1. Each channel has two inputs, the first listed in the table goes to the + input, second to the
– input.
2. Pins BB through NN are not used in the StrataView/Visor 48 channel system

190
 Geophone Connector Pin Assignments for StrataVisor NZ Seismographs with 49 to
60 Channels
Bendix Connector 1 Bendix Connector 2
Channel Pins Channel Pins
1 z/AA 31 MM/NN
2 x/y 32 KK/LL
3 v/w 33 HH/JJ
4 t/u 34 FF/GG
5 r/s 35 DD/EE
6 p/q 36 BB/CC
7 m/n 37 A/B
8 j/k 38 C/D
9 h/i 39 E/F
10 f/g 40 G/H
11 d/e 41 J/K
12 b/c 42 L/M
13 Z/a 43 N/P
14 X/Y 44 R/S
15 V/W 45 T/U
16 T/U 46 V/W
17 R/S 47 X/Y
18 N/P 48 Z/a
19 L/M 49 b/c
20 J/K 50 d/e
21 G/H 51 f/g
22 E/F 52 h/i
23 C/D 53 j/k
24 A/B 54 m/n
25 BB/CC 55 p/q
26 DD/EE 56 r/s
27 FF/GG 57 t/u
28 HH/JJ 58 v/w
29 KK/LL 59 x/y
30 MM/NN 60 z/AA
GND PP GND PP

Notes:
1. Each channel has two inputs, the first listed in the table goes to the + input, second to the
– input.

191
4.2.6.2 Power Connector

The power connector on a StrataVisor NZ is a 3-pin connector manufactured by Cannon. The

mating connector used on the power cable is a Cannon WK-3-21C (Geometrics part no.
21-133-032).
Pin Use
1 +12 V DC
2 common
3 not used

The Geode uses a waterproof connector made by Brad Harrison (41307N, 5 pin/16), Geometrics
part number 60-201-001. It is wired as follows:

Pin Use
1 not used
2 +12 V DC
3 chassis ground
4 not used
5 common

Some versions of the Geode may have a different, completely waterproof 5 pin connector.
Contact the factory for an updated wiring pattern.

4.2.6.3 Start Connector

The start or trigger connector is a 3-pin connector manufactured by Bendix and others. The
mating connector, used on the standard hammer switch, HVB-1 blasters, and the hammer switch
extension cable is a PT06A-8-3P(SR) (Geometrics part no. 21-206-003).

Pin Use
A Trigger input
B Common
C Not used

The other end of the hammer switch extension cable uses PT01A-8-3S(SR) (Geometrics part no.
21-207-038) wired with the same pin assignments.

192
4.2.6.4 Digital Interface Connector

The digital interface cable is pinless and is considered a

network “crossover” cable since it is wired between two
similar network devices. Cables are constructed using
Belden 1752A cable. Follow the table below and make
sure that the correct color coding is followed as specific
pairs of wires are wrapped together to control
capacitance in the cable to ensure long distance
operation.

Pin Connection Color Function

J K WHITE/ORANGE TX+ to RX+
K J WHITE/GREEN RX+ to TX+
H B ORANGE TX- to RX-
B H GREEN RX- to TX-
C C BROWN Remote Power
Up+
D D BLUE Trigger A
E E WHITE/BLUE Trigger B
F F WHITE/BROWN Power Up -
A n/c L n/c A and L are
not connected

Note that Geometrics manufactures a digital cable tester (P/N 28143-01) to verify all conductors
in the digital cable are connected.

Geode digital interface cables are available as either lightweight, or with an abrasion resistant
coating. Maximum digital cable lengths are as follows:

o 250 m length between Geodes

o 250 m between the first Geode and an NZ with internal channels on the same line
o 100 m between network connections on NZs with no channels
o 100 m between the first Geode(s) and an NZC
o 100 m between a laptop and the first Geode

193
4.3 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Look outside the seismograph first; most field failures are related to external devices. These can
usually be corrected by the operator.

4.3.1 Power
The most common problem is power failure, normally a discharged battery. The front panel has a
series of lights which constantly display the battery voltage. The lights are not dependent on the
internal power supply or computer, so they will function even in case of an equipment fault.
Monitor the battery voltage during field operations. When the voltage drops below 10 volts, little
operating time is left and every effort should be made to complete the survey as soon as possible.
Become familiar with the pattern that the lights follow, so that you can anticipate battery
discharge.

A battery will deteriorate in storage unless it is charged regularly. If charged monthly, the battery
should retain its capacity for years. A failing battery will show decreased operating life, and will
charge up in less time.

With the clip-type power cable, a vehicle battery can be used to operate the system. If the polarity
is reversed, the system will not operate. However, the StrataVisor is protected from damage
due to polarity reversal.

If the system shows symptoms of power failure, check the fuse located under the front panel near
the printer.

4.3.2 External Keyboard Problems

Not all keyboards work the same. If the system doesn’t respond to your keyboard, try plugging it
in both before and after booting the system. If that doesn’t work, try a different keyboard. On
some compact keyboards, some of the letter keys double as numerical keys if the NUMLOCK is
on. When connected to the StrataVisor on boot-up, NUMLOCK is sometimes enabled
automatically.

4.3.3 Sensor Problems

If the geophone test (see Chapter 3) shows an open channel, check to see that the geophone is
properly connected. If so, try substituting a different geophone. If this does not correct the
problem, then the cable is suspect. Sometimes, a cable that is faulty from one end will work
properly when reversed.

4.3.4 Print Problems

If the printer will not print, open the top of the seismograph and make sure that the paper is
properly installed and that the release lever is in the correct position (see diagram under lid, or
Section 3.2.2.1). Check to see if the printer cable is plugged into the printer port next to the
keyboard connection. Also, check the cable at the back of the printer for proper seating. If the

194
printer scrolls out blank paper, the paper is probably installed backwards (it is thermal paper and
only sensitive on one side).

4.3.5 Trigger Problems

If the system will not trigger, try using the manual trigger in the test function to see if the system
triggers that way. Then, try triggering with the hammer switch without the hammer switch
extension cable connected. Substitution (of another hammer switch) can be used to test for a
defective hammer switch. Triggering can also be tested by shorting pins A and B of the trigger
connector with a small piece of wire (a paper clip works well). If that works, then the problem is
generally external to the instrument. The voltage between pins A and B should be between 4-5
volts DC.

If false triggering occurs only with a trigger extension cable or with networked systems, try
grounding the system to earth ground using the ground lug located near the trigger connector.
Also, try to use coaxial cable or twisted pair wires for the trigger extension. Be sure the voltage
between pins A and B on the trigger connector is 4-5 volts DC.

If trigger noise appears on seismic records, try grounding the system and using coaxial trigger
cable. Also, effort should be made to keep the trigger wire away from the geophone cable to
prevent cross feed. If the trigger line must intersect the geophone spread, it should do so at a
right angle.

4.3.6 Digital Cabling Problems

Geodes use digital cables to communicate between each other and to transfer data back to the host
controller. Geometrics sells two types of cables, a light-duty CAT 5 data for periodic use and a
heavier duty rugged cable for professional use in harsh environments.

Blue LED’s on either side of the Geode boxes and on the side of the NZ controller signal whether
the digital cables are properly connected and communicating. If an LED adjacent to a digital
cable is not flashing, then communication has been broken. Alternately, Geometrics sells a digital
cables tester that checks continuity (Geometrics part number 28143-01).

Digital cables can be repaired in the field (refer to the digital interface connector section) and
digitals less than 125 m can be replaced with standard CAT from a local hardware store. For
longer cables, we recommend Belden 1725A cables, as capacitance between signal pairs are more
closely controlled.

4.3.7 Hardware/ Software Error Messages

4.3.7.1 Cannot find empty data element for new data.

Data is coming from the Geodes faster than it can be processed by the host PC. Requires an
increase of the number of buffers in the registry. Contact Geometrics for more detailed
instructions.

195
4.3.7.2 DSP code download failed

Check the battery voltage on all of the Geodes. Restart the controller and try again. One of the
Geodes may have reset itself inadvertently.

4.3.7.3 Cannot create Ethernet port

NZ or laptop requires a cold reboot to initialize Ethernet ports.

4.3.7.4 No acquisition board detected

Power is off to some of the Geodes or one of the Ethernet lines has become disconnected. Check
the power and reboot the system

4.3.7.5 Incomplete data on file

Ethernet cable may be intermittent, noisy or too long. Trigger line may be broken in the Ethernet
cable. Power may be intermittent to one of the Geodes

4.3.7.6 Could not convert geode # to acquisition #

Master trigger is set outside the range of Geodes

4.3.8 StrataVisor NZ Internal System Problems

If you are comfortable working on your personal computer (that is, installing circuit boards and
disk drives), then you should be qualified to perform simple repairs on the StrataVisor.
Alternatively, a local computer service center may be able to assist you with some problems in an
emergency.

On rare occasions, the StrataVisor software on the hard disk may become corrupted. Symptoms
include a blank display or a message on the screen after the power up sequence instead of seismic
traces. If this happens, try and re-load the system software from the disk supplied with the
seismograph. Simply insert the support disk in the floppy drive or CD writer and follow the
instructions on the label.

For repair discussion purposes, the StrataVisor can be broken into two functional blocks. These
will be called the "seismograph" and the "computer" for convenience, although they are closely
integrated.

4.3.8.1 CMOS Settings for the Geometrics StrataVisor NZ

Press DEL when prompted after power up. You will see the following menu items.

196
 Basic CMMOS Configuration
Custom Configuration
Shadow Configuration
Reset CMOS to last known values
Reset COMS to factory defaults
Write to CMOS and exit
Exit without changing CMOS

Choose “Reset CMOS to factory defaults” and press enter. The system will reboot. Press DEL
again to come back to the above menu.

Choose “Basic CMOS configuration”. Make the following changes to the settings

Set the clock correctly.

In the section entitled: IDE DRIVE GEOMETRY

Set Ide 0: 3 = AUTOCONFIG, LBA

In the section entitled: DRIVE ASSIGNMENT ORDER:

Set Drive C: Ide 0

In the section entitled: BOOT ORDER:

Set Drive C: at the top of the list
With Drive A: second on the list

Press ESC to go back one menu level.

Now choose Custom Settings. Make the following changes.

On the left-hand column find the following and set as indicated:

Display type: both

Press ESC to go back one menu level

Finally choose:
Write to CMOS and exit.

197
5 File Storage and Data Handling
5.1 File Format

A "file" is the data from a seismic record recorded onto the disk. The data may be from a single
shot, or data stacked from a number of hammer blows or "shots". The seismic record is held in
memory in the seismograph until the operator decides to write it onto the disk (or tape). When
data is written to disk, it is given a file name. The term "trace" is used to refer to the data from
just one channel of the seismograph.

The formats available on the StrataVisor NZ and Geode are SEG-2, SEG-YMGOS and SEG-DMGOS,
the standards for seismic data files established by the Society of Exploration Geophysicists2,3.
With the establishment of these standards, many data processing packages are able to read the
files from Geometrics seismographs. Most third-party software developers have also standardized
one or more of these formats. The complete standards are available from the SEG.

Linear dimensions and coordinates may be either meter, feet, or stations, but should be consistent
throughout the file.

The following sections describe the SEG-2, SEG-YMGOS and SEG-DMGOS formats used in the
StrataVisor and Geode.

5.1.1 SEG-2 File Structure

{beginning of file)
The file is organized on the disk as blocks: a File
Descriptor Block, followed by a sequence of Trace
FILE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK
Descriptor Blocks and Data Blocks.
TRACE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK 1
DATA BLOCK 1
The File Descriptor Block contains information
TRACE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK 2
common to all the traces in the file, plus it
DATA BLOCK 2
provides information required to parse the rest
...............
of the overhead data. Another name for this
...............
block is the "File Header"
TRACE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK N
DATA BLOCK N
Each Trace Descriptor Block provides location,
format, and other information pertinent to its
( d f fil )
corresponding Data Block (containing the data from a trace). Another name for this block is
"Trace Header".

The Data Block consists of fixed point or floating point numbers as specified by their
corresponding Trace Descriptor Block. This block contains the data from one channel (or one
trace) of the seismograph.

2
Pullan, S. E., 1990, Recommended Standard for Seismic (Radar) Data Files in the Personal Computer
Environment: Geophysics, Vol. 55, No. 9, September 1990, pp. 1260-1271.

3
SEG Subcommittee on Field Tape Standards, Digital Field Tape Format Standards - SEG-D, REVISION
1: Geophysics, Vol. 59, No. 4, April, 1994, pp. 668-684.

198
There is a Trace Descriptor Block for each Data Block (in other words, there is a trace header for
each block of data from one trace). The blocks are arranged in numerical order.

Pointers are written in the file blocks to indicate locations of the blocks with respect to the
beginning of the file. Pointers are always long integers (32 bits). All addressing is to byte
boundaries. All blocks start on double word (32 bit) boundaries.

Integers are 16-bit numbers written low byte first to conform to the Intel processors used with our
software. Long integers are 32-bit numbers, also written low byte first. Hexadecimal number
4547 would be written 47 45 in the file. A 32-bit (4-byte) data sample, such as 0001D340 would
be written 40 D3 01 00.

A typical file is shown later in an example, with interpretable characters shown in the right side
column. Referring to this example will be helpful in understanding the following descriptions of
the data format.

199
5.1.1.1 File Descriptor Block

The first block in the file is the File Descriptor Block. The construction of the File Descriptor
Block is:

Byte

0-1 3a55 (File Descriptor Block ID)

2-3 REVISION NUMBER
4-5 SIZE OF TRACE POINTER SUB-BLOCK (M)
6-7 NUMBER OF TRACES IN FILE (N)
8 SIZE OF STRING TERMINATOR
9 FIRST STRING TERMINATOR CHARACTER
10 SECOND STRING TERMINATOR CHARACTER
11 SIZE OF LINE TERMINATOR
12 FIRST LINE TERMINATOR CHARACTER
13 SECOND LINE TERMINATOR CHARACTER
14-31 RESERVED
32-35 POINTER TO TRACE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK 1
36-39 POINTER TO TRACE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK 2
---- ----------------------------------
---- POINTER TO TRACE DESCRIPTOR BLOCK N
33+M STRING 1
STRING 2
.........
M STRING Z

This block holds information common to all traces in the file and pertaining to the structure and
interpretation of the file. It consists of

(i) 32 bytes providing the block identifier, the revision number, the size of the Trace Pointer
sub-block, the number of traces in this file, and the string and line terminator,

(ii) a Trace Pointer sub-block giving pointers to the start of each Trace Descriptor Block in
the file, and

(iii) followed by optional strings with information related to the entire file such as date, time,
delay, constant, high cut filter frequency, line number, low cut filter frequency, notch
filter frequency, sample interval, shot coordinate, shot interval, shot map, and shot offset.

200
The File Descriptor Block ID (bytes 0 and 1 of this block and of the file) contains the integer
3a55 (in hexadecimal). This integer identifies the file as a seismic data file following this
standard and identifies this block as the Record Descriptor Block (55 appears first, since it is the
low byte).

The File Standard Revision Number (bytes 2 and 3) appear next.

Bytes 4 and 5 contain an integer giving the size of the Trace Pointer Sub-block in bytes (see
below). All blocks start on double-word boundaries and are divisible by four.

Bytes 6 and 7 contain the number of traces in this file.

The String Terminator is one or two non-printable ASCII characters (decimal ASCII codes 0
through 31) used to separate the strings that hold the information in character string form in this
(the File Descriptor) block, and the Trace Descriptor Blocks. Byte 8 is 01 (hex) and bytes 9 and
10 are 00 (hex) indicating the string terminator used by the StrataVisor is the NULL character.

The Line Terminator is one or two ASCII characters used to separate the lines of text in the Notes
Block. In the StrataVisor, byte 11 is 01 (size of line terminator, 01 hex), byte 12 is 0A (line
terminator character), and byte 13 is 00 (hex) indicating the Line Terminator used by the
StrataVisor is the Linefeed (0A) character.

Bytes 14 through 31 are reserved and written as 00.

The Trace Pointer Sub-block starts at byte 32, and contains pointers (unsigned long integers) to
the start of each Trace Descriptor Block in the file. The length of this sub-block in bytes is
specified in bytes 4 and 5, and the number of pointers (corresponding to the number of traces)
contained in the sub-block is specified in bytes 6 and 7 (see above).

Following the Trace Pointer Sub-block is a free format section containing strings to provide
optional information common to all traces in the file (the acquisition parameters, date and time,
line geometry, etc.). Each string starts with an integer giving the length of the string (the offset to
the next string), followed by a key word naming the parameter in the string, followed by the value
(in ASCII), and terminated by the null character string terminator (indicated in bytes 8, 9, and 10
above). A list of key words used in the descriptor blocks will be found later in this chapter.

201
5.1.1.2 Trace Descriptor Block

The Trace Descriptor Block contains information relative to an individual trace (seismograph
channel). Each Trace Descriptor Block is followed by a Data Block containing the data for that
trace. The construction of the Trace Descriptor Block is:

Byte

0-1 4422 (Trace descriptor block ID)

2-3 SIZE OF THIS BLOCK IN BYTES (X)
4-7 SIZE OF FOLLOWING DATA BLOCK IN BYTES (Y)
8-11 NUMBER OF SAMPLES IN DATA BLOCK
12 DATA FORMAT CODE
13-31 RESERVED
32 STRING 1
STRING 2
.........
X STRING Z

The actual byte number for the start of the Trace Descriptor Block varies with the length of the
Record Descriptor Block. The optional strings follow with information pertinent to that block
(channel number, descaling factor, geophone group location, number of stacks, etc.).

The Trace Descriptor (bytes 0 and 1) contains the integer 4422 (hex) to identify this block as a
Trace Descriptor Block.

The Block size (bytes 2 and 3) contains the integer giving the size of this block in bytes.

The Size of Data Block (bytes 4 through 7) contains the long (32-bit) integer giving the size of the
following Data Block corresponding to this Trace Descriptor Block.

The Number of Samples in Data Block (bytes 8 through 11) contains the integer giving the size of
the Data Block in samples.

202
The Data Format Code (bytes 12) specifies the data format in the following data block according
to the following table:

Byte value Data Format

01 16-bit fixed point

02 32-bit fixed point
03 20-bit floating point (SEG convention)
04 32-bit floating point (IEEE standard)
05 64-bit floating point (IEEE standard)

The StrataVisor presently offers data recording in code 02, 32-bit fixed point data. Contact the
factory regarding 32 bit floating point (04).

The next twenty bytes (bytes 13 through 31) are a series of zeros. This space is reserved.

The rest of the Trace Descriptor Block contains a series of strings. The string format and
convention is the same as that used in the File Descriptor Block.

5.1.1.3 Data Block

A data block follows each Trace Descriptor Block. This is the data for the corresponding trace in
the selected format. Except for the last trace (or a single channel record), the Data Block will be
followed by the Trace Descriptor Block for the next trace.

5.1.1.4 String Format

The Record and Trace Descriptor Blocks contain strings that provide information about the
survey or the specific trace. Each string starts with an integer giving the length of the string,
followed by a keyword that names the parameter in the string, then the value (in ASCII format)
corresponding to that word, and then ends with the string terminator (null character). Keywords
can not have embedded spaces (use _ for space, decimal ASCII code 95). The keyword and the
associated data are separated by one or more spaces or tabs. To assist application program string
searches, all strings are ordered alphabetically according to the keyword, and all alpha characters
are uppercase.

Numeric values may be decimal integers or decimal floating point numbers. Negative decimal
numbers are preceded by a minus sign "-". Decimal floating point numbers may use an "E" to
express the number in scientific notation. Decimal points must be followed by a numeric
character. The numbers in the following list are allowable numeric expressions. Unless stated
otherwise, integers must have magnitude less than 32,000 (16 bits).

12, -3, -12.657, -34.6, -1.345E24, -2.3E6, -5.6E-11, -2.0E-9

Some values like time and date are expressed in the special indicated format.

5.1.1.5 Key Words Used in File Descriptor Block

The File Descriptor Block normally contains the following strings. Other strings may be added
later. Not all strings supported by the SEG standard are used by the StrataVisor.

203
ACQUISITION_DATE

The date the data were acquired, in dd/mmm/yyyy format. For example April 1, 1988 would be
stored as 01/APR/1988.

ACQUISITION_TIME

The time of day the data were acquired. The format is 24-hour time stored in hh:mm:ss format.
For example 3:30PM would be stored as 15:30:00.

GENERAL_CONSTANT

A positive decimal number of 12 or fewer digits, entered by the operator as a general purpose
number.

INSTRUMENT_GEOMETRICS_StrataVisor

Identifies instrument used to collect the data.

TRACE_SORT

Identifies the trace sort. "As Acquired" is used for normal field records.

UNITS

Identifies measuring system, e.g. feet, meters. NONE is written to designate that system does not
differentiate between systems.

NOTE

This string appears as the last string and contains notes and parameters not defined in the
standard.

5.1.1.6 Key Words Used in Trace Descriptor Blocks

CHANNEL_NUMBER

The channel number is a positive integer identifying the seismograph channel (or trace).

DELAY

The delay value is a floating point number expressing the time (in seconds) elapsed from the start
pulse to recording the first sample in the Data Block.

DESCALING_FACTOR

204
A floating point number used to determine the true amplitude of the input signal. To convert
from a data sample value to the actual input voltage (in millivolts) to the seismograph from the
geophone, the formula is:

input voltage due to one shot =

data point * DESCALING_FACTOR / STACK_COUNT

Notice that an individual trace is corrected for multiple hammer blows by dividing by the number
of stacks, so the result is the average input voltage from a single shot. Thus, the trace header
allows for different stack counts on each trace, and when selected channels are frozen they not
only stop acquiring data, but the stack counter also stops. On the Geode/NZ system, the scaling
factor will be different for different preamp gains. For 36 dB preamp gain, the descaling factor is
4.270400E-5; for 24 dB the descaling factor is 1.698500E-004.

HIGH_CUT_FILTER

The HIGH_CUT_FILTER values are positive decimal integers expressing the high cut filter 3 dB
frequency in Hz and slope in dB per octave. A value of 0 for the frequency indicates the filter
was not implemented.

LINE_NUMBER

The line id is a collection of printable ASCII characters.

LOW_CUT_FILTER

The LOW_CUT_FILTER values are positive decimal integers expressing the low cut filter 3 dB
frequency in Hz and slope in dB per octave. A value of 0 for the frequency indicates the filter
was not implemented.

205
NOTCH_FREQUENCY

The NOTCH_FREQUENCY value is a positive decimal integer or floating point number

expressing the notch filter frequency in Hz. A value of 0 indicates a notch filter was not
implemented.

RECEIVER_LOCATION

This is the location of the geophone group for the particular trace. It is the dimension along the
line, using the same linear coordinate system as the SOURCE_LOCATION.

In the file, each geophone group will have a location specified in the Trace Descriptor Block, as
does the shot point in the Record Descriptor, providing that the operator has correctly entered the
information in the geometry menu during data acquisition. Note however, that use of file storage
for location is optional, that the operator's log may contain the same information, and that the
files may be edited later to insert or correct this information.

SAMPLE_INTERVAL

The value is a floating point number expressing the time between samples in seconds.

SOURCE_LOCATION

This is the location of the shot. This value is a linear coordinate specifying location along the
survey line relative to some reference. May specify depth in a drill hole.

STACK_COUNT

This stack count is a positive integer indicating the number of times data were stacked into an
individual trace. This number may be different for each channel (trace).

206
5.1.1.7 SEG-2 File Format Example

Following is a listing of a typical file. The byte column lists the byte number in sequence. The
right side column shows the interpreted code, where the byte corresponds to an ASCII character
that can be interpreted on a standard line printer. Non-interpretable code is shown as a ".". The
Record Descriptor Block starts at byte 0000, with the number 3a55 (listed low byte first). The
first Trace Descriptor Block starts at byte 0138, with the number 4422.

Byte Numbers in Hexadecimal lower byte first Interpreted Code

00000000 55 3A 01 00 80 10 18 00 01 00 00 01 0A 00 00 00 U:··············
00000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
00000020 D0 11 00 00 B0 2C 00 00 90 47 00 00 70 62 00 00 ·····,···G··pb··
00000030 50 7D 00 00 30 98 00 00 14 B3 00 00 F8 CD 00 00 P}··0···········
00000040 DC E8 00 00 C0 03 01 00 A4 1E 01 00 88 39 01 00 ·············9··
00000050 6C 54 01 00 50 6F 01 00 34 8A 01 00 18 A5 01 00 lT··Po··4·······
00000060 FC BF 01 00 E0 DA 01 00 C4 F5 01 00 A8 10 02 00 ················
00000070 8C 2B 02 00 70 46 02 00 54 61 02 00 38 7C 02 00 ·+··pF··Ta··8|··
00000080 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
00000090 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
000000A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
000000B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
.
.
.
strings
.
.
00001050 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
00001060 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
00001070 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
00001080 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
00001090 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
000010A0 1F 00 41 43 51 55 49 53 49 54 49 4F 4E 5F 44 41 ··ACQUISITION_DA
000010B0 54 45 20 31 38 2F 4F 63 74 2F 32 30 30 31 00 1C TE 18/Oct/2001··
000010C0 00 41 43 51 55 49 53 49 54 49 4F 4E 5F 54 49 4D ·ACQUISITION_TIM
000010D0 45 20 31 36 3A 31 39 3A 33 39 00 15 00 43 4F 4D E 16:19:39···COM
000010E0 50 41 4E 59 20 47 65 6F 6D 65 74 72 69 63 73 00 PANY Geometrics·
000010F0 22 00 49 4E 53 54 52 55 4D 45 4E 54 20 47 45 4F "·INSTRUMENT GEO
00001100 4D 45 54 52 49 43 53 20 4D 47 4F 53 20 30 30 30 METRICS MGOS 000
00001110 30 00 0E 00 4A 4F 42 5F 49 44 20 30 30 30 30 00 0···JOB_ID 0000·
00001120 14 00 4F 42 53 45 52 56 45 52 20 4F 62 73 65 72 ··OBSERVER Obser
00001130 76 65 72 00 19 00 54 52 41 43 45 5F 53 4F 52 54 ver···TRACE_SORT
00001140 20 41 53 5F 41 43 51 55 49 52 45 44 00 0D 00 55 AS_ACQUIRED···U
00001150 4E 49 54 53 20 46 45 45 54 00 72 00 4E 4F 54 45 NITS FEET·r·NOTE
00001160 20 0A 20 42 41 53 45 5F 49 4E 54 45 52 56 41 4C · BASE_INTERVAL
00001170 20 32 2E 30 30 20 0A 20 53 48 4F 54 5F 49 4E 43 2.00 · SHOT_INC
00001180 52 45 4D 45 4E 54 20 30 2E 30 30 20 0A 20 50 48 REMENT 0.00 · PH
00001190 4F 4E 45 5F 49 4E 43 52 45 4D 45 4E 54 20 30 2E ONE_INCREMENT 0.
000011A0 30 30 20 0A 20 41 47 43 5F 57 49 4E 44 4F 57 20 00 · AGC_WINDOW
000011B0 30 20 0A 20 44 49 53 50 4C 41 59 5F 46 49 4C 54 0 · DISPLAY_FILT
000011C0 45 52 53 20 30 20 30 20 0A 0A 00 00 00 00 00 00 ERS 0 0 ········
000011D0 22 44 E0 01 00 19 00 00 40 06 00 00 04 00 00 00 "D······@·······
000011E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ················
000011F0 19 00 41 4C 49 41 53 5F 46 49 4C 54 45 52 20 33 ··ALIAS_FILTER 3
00001200 33 33 33 2E 33 33 20 30 00 1A 00 41 4D 50 4C 49 333.33 0···AMPLI
00001210 54 55 44 45 5F 52 45 43 4F 56 45 52 59 20 4E 4F TUDE_RECOVERY NO
00001220 4E 45 00 13 00 43 48 41 4E 4E 45 4C 5F 4E 55 4D NE···CHANNEL_NUM
00001230 42 45 52 20 31 00 0F 00 44 45 4C 41 59 20 2D 30 BER 1···DELAY -0
00001240 2E 30 31 30 00 21 00 44 45 53 43 41 4C 49 4E 47 .010·!·DESCALING
00001250 5F 46 41 43 54 4F 52 20 34 2E 32 37 30 34 30 30 _FACTOR 4.270400
00001260 45 2D 30 30 35 00 1E 00 44 49 47 49 54 41 4C 5F E-005···DIGITAL_
00001270 48 49 47 48 5F 43 55 54 5F 46 49 4C 54 45 52 20 HIGH_CUT_FILTER
00001280 30 20 30 00 1D 00 44 49 47 49 54 41 4C 5F 4C 4F 0 0···DIGITAL_LO

207
00001290 57 5F 43 55 54 5F 46 49 4C 54 45 52 20 30 20 30 W_CUT_FILTER 0 0
000012A0 00 13 00 46 49 58 45 44 5F 47 41 49 4E 20 33 36 ···FIXED_GAIN 36
000012B0 20 44 42 00 0C 00 4C 49 4E 45 5F 49 44 20 30 00 DB···LINE_ID 0·
000012C0 15 00 4C 4F 57 5F 43 55 54 5F 46 49 4C 54 45 52 ··LOW_CUT_FILTER
000012D0 20 30 20 30 00 14 00 4E 4F 54 43 48 5F 46 52 45 0 0···NOTCH_FRE
000012E0 51 55 45 4E 43 59 20 30 00 20 00 52 41 57 5F 52 QUENCY 0· ·RAW_R
000012F0 45 43 4F 52 44 20 43 3A 5C 6C 69 6E 65 20 32 5C ECORD C:\line 2\
00001300 32 30 30 31 2E 64 61 74 00 19 00 52 45 43 45 49 2001.dat···RECEI
00001310 56 45 52 5F 4C 4F 43 41 54 49 4F 4E 20 30 2E 30 VER_LOCATION 0.0
00001320 30 00 1B 00 53 41 4D 50 4C 45 5F 49 4E 54 45 52 0···SAMPLE_INTER
00001330 56 41 4C 20 30 2E 30 30 30 31 32 35 00 1C 00 53 VAL 0.000125···S
00001340 48 4F 54 5F 53 45 51 55 45 4E 43 45 5F 4E 55 4D HOT_SEQUENCE_NUM
00001350 42 45 52 20 32 30 30 31 00 12 00 53 4B 45 57 20 BER 2001···SKEW
00001360 2D 30 2E 30 30 30 30 36 32 35 00 19 00 53 4F 55 -0.0000625···SOU
00001370 52 43 45 5F 4C 4F 43 41 54 49 4F 4E 20 2D 31 30 RCE_LOCATION -10
00001380 2E 30 30 00 0A 00 53 54 41 43 4B 20 38 00 1F 00 .00···STACK 8···
00001390 4E 4F 54 45 20 0A 20 44 49 53 50 4C 41 59 5F 53 NOTE · DISPLAY_S
000013A0 43 41 4C 45 20 34 37 20 20 0A 0A 00 00 00 00 00 CALE 47 ·······
000013B0 E0 FB 5B 40 64 F1 81 42 D2 74 86 42 AD A0 CA 42 ··[@d··B·t·B···B
000013C0 0E A5 96 42 30 F9 14 42 1C 10 4D 42 DF C0 04 C2 ···B0··B··MB····
000013D0 9C 85 0C C2 18 EB 75 41 76 AD 4B 42 EE 5F 60 42 ······uAv·KB·_`B
000013E0 88 28 EF 41 B1 27 13 42 CB 30 0C 42 F8 7F 28 42 ·(·A·'·B·0·B· (B
000013F0 54 42 63 41 B2 96 EA 41 48 2B 56 42 BC 99 E9 41 TBcA···AH+VB···A
00001400 80 65 DA 41 6C 19 74 42 61 7A E7 42 9E 4F AD 42 ·e·Al·tBaz·B·O·B
00001410 BC E8 BD 42 D5 87 02 43 E1 B1 C3 42 1A 4A C6 42 ···B···C···B·J·B
00001420 EA 73 EC 42 73 4B 1D 43 2C 35 16 43 47 E6 04 43 ·s·BsK·C,5·CG··C
00001430 6A 96 44 43 78 C1 37 43 2F B8 24 43 BD 9B 38 43 j·DCx·7C/·$C··8C
00001440 02 CC 10 43 5B C5 68 43 1E FC 67 43 B4 E1 B1 42 ···C[·hC··gC···B
00001450 DA D1 C1 42 0A 54 E7 42 64 9B CE 42 6C 93 69 41 ···B·T·Bd··Bl·iA
00001460 00 32 93 40 16 B5 E8 41 7A A0 4A C2 99 F6 FB 40 ·2·@···Az·J····@
00001470 9A AC 0C 42 BE AD 0A C2 10 54 6E C2 08 79 CA C2 ···B·····Tn··y··
00001480 DC 7A 89 C2 86 56 BE C1 13 58 87 C2 9E 5A 29 C2 ·z···V···X···Z)·
00001490 20 E5 03 42 50 3F 84 C1 B0 34 62 41 B6 E3 9A 41 ··BP?···4bA···A
000014A0 58 8A 15 41 6C E5 B4 41 7C 55 1F 43 F7 7C 86 43 X··Al··A|U·C·|·C
000014B0 67 60 68 43 4E 89 09 43 CE 93 81 42 64 33 81 42 g`hCN··C···Bd3·B
000014C0 C0 4C 5D BF C0 37 D2 3F C4 D7 33 42 98 79 A9 C1 ·L]··7·?··3B·y··
000014D0 E6 D6 57 C2 00 D9 AA C2 F9 5C 34 C3 CA 7B 3A C3 ··W······\4··{:·
000014E0 EE 87 21 C3 0C 6D 5C C3 95 27 42 C3 D2 A8 13 C3 ··!··m\··'B·····
000014F0 45 0A 52 C3 A9 41 4D C3 C9 1D 0A C3 35 EB 09 C3 E·R··AM·····5···
00001500 7B 67 09 C3 F8 20 B1 C2 49 E9 83 C2 CE 90 B1 C2 {g··· ··I·······
00001510 10 DE C8 C2 69 1D 10 C3 12 E1 F5 C2 0C F5 B9 C2 ····i···········
00001520 D8 D0 09 C3 8A FB 32 C2 06 C2 9A C2 8B 64 46 C3 ······2······dF·
00001530 6E 0A 37 C3 44 07 56 C3 D4 27 8C C3 F6 9C BE C3 n·7·D·V··'······
00001540 52 81 CE C3 8D E4 C0 C3 8F FF B4 C3 8D 38 BB C3 R············8··
00001550 81 FD BA C3 5C C4 4E C3 5A C7 1A C3 DC C1 EC C2 ····\·N·Z·······
00001560 C0 41 B0 3F 48 DF 75 C2 A4 73 56 C1 CE 09 D4 41 ·A·?H·u··sV····A
00001570 D5 96 94 C2 00 C2 DA 40 34 75 EF 41 28 DD AD C1 ·······@4u·A(···
00001580 BA 23 52 42 BD BB 4F 43 0A 3D 77 43 F8 94 67 43 ·#RB··OC·=wC··gC
00001590 AB 28 99 43 CB 82 56 43 86 4E 1F 43 62 32 C5 42 ·(·C··VC·N·Cb2·B
000015A0 10 8D FA C0 42 81 80 C2 08 98 37 C3 12 AC 46 C3 ····B·····7···F·
000015B0 6A F7 3B C3 91 C9 19 C3 8B 00 47 C3 22 63 79 C3 j·;·······G·"cy·
000015C0 E9 0F 4E C3 E6 01 69 C3 21 0D 82 C3 B4 3C 93 C3 ··N···i·!····<··
000015D0 1F 13 A7 C3 C7 2C AA C3 50 EF BD C3 3F 32 D7 C3 ·····,··P···?2··
000015E0 F6 65 AA C3 33 25 B7 C3 4A EA D4 C3 B3 1C A2 C3 ·e··3%··J·······

data from trace 1 continues

208
5.1.2 SEG-D File Structure

The following section describes the SEG-D format used in the StrataVisor.
Three general header blocks, scan type header, demux trace header, and trace header extension
are used in SEG-D format to store trace information. The following are the fields used in each
header block:

• General header, block #2 - Expanded File Number ( if number is greater than 9999 ), SEG-D
Revision Number ( = 1 ), Extended Record Length, Gen. Header Block # ( = 2), Last Four
Bytes of General header block #2 ( = descaling factor ).

• General header, block #3 - Source Line Number (integer), Source Line Number (fraction),
Source Point Number (integer), Source Point Number (fraction), Gen. Header Block # ( = 3 ).

• 1st Scan type header - Scan Type Number ( = 1 ), Channel Set Number ( = 1 ), Channel Set
Start Time, Channel Set End Time, Number of Channels, Channel Type ( = 1 for data channel
), Channel Gain ( = 3, always fixed gain ), Alias Filter Frequency ( if any*), Alias Filter Slope (
if any* ), Low Cut Filter ( if any* ), Low Cut Filter Slope (if any*), First Notch Filter ( if any* ),
Second Notch Filter ( if any* ), Vertical Stack.

• 2nd Scan type header - Scan Type Number ( = 1 ), Channel Set Number ( = 2 ), Channel Set
Start Time, Channel Set End Time, Number of Channels, Channel Type ( = 7 for pilot or aux
channel ), Channel Gain ( = 3, always fixed gain ), Alias Filter Frequency ( if any* ), Alias
Filter Slope ( if any* ), Low Cut Filter ( if any* ), Low Cut Filter Slope ( if any* ), First Notch
Filter ( if any* ), Second Notch Filter ( if any* ), Vertical Stack.

For each channel:

• Demux trace header - File Number ( if number is less than 10000 ), Channel Set Number, Trace
Number, Trace Header Exten. ( = 1 ), Sample Skew, Extended File Number ( if number is
greater than 9999 ).

• Trace header extension - Receiver Point Number.

All fields that are not used will be recorded as zero. The data followed by each demux trace
header and trace header extension has 8085 data format that stands for 32-bit IEEE
demultiplexed.

*
If there is no filter selected, all these fields will be recorded as zero. High cut filter is recorded in Alias
Filter Frequency and Alias Filter Slope. If both filters are high cut filters, the one with lower frequency is
recorded. Similarly, if both filters are low cut filters, the one with higher frequency is recorded.

209
5.1.2.1 SEG-D File Format Example

Byte Numbers in Hexadecimal lower byte first Interpreted Code

000000 10 54 80 58 00 00 00 00 00 00 96 23 47 15 54 12 .T.X.......#G.T.
000010 00 00 F8 00 00 00 04 00 00 8F FF 01 02 00 00 00 ................
000020 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 02 ................
000030 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 9D 4F 65 36 .............Oe6
000040 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
000050 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
000060 01 01 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 24 10 03 00 00 00 00 .........$......
000070 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 ................
000080 01 02 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 70 03 00 00 00 00 ..........p.....
000090 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 ................
0000A0 10 54 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 AB 00 00 00 00 00 .T..............
0000B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 27 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 ........'.......
0000C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ................
0000D0 00 00 00 00 3A 4B 55 98 38 80 FC C8 38 FA CF 14 ....:KU.8...8...
0000E0 B9 24 D1 39 BA 6C 7A 1A BA 34 0B 82 38 BA 50 B0 .$.9.l...4..8.P.
0000F0 3A 37 A0 C1 3A 1A 11 7D 39 41 7B 2C 39 48 A5 A9 :7..:..}9A{,9H..
000100 39 00 FC C8 3A 3A 50 B0 3A 88 27 45 39 21 3B FA 9...::P.:.'E9!;.
000110 BA 43 45 CC BA 2A 31 17 3A A3 06 9A 3A BA 50 B0 .CE..*1.:...:.P.
000120 38 B3 26 33 3A 52 80 15 39 B4 F0 D2 BA 0F 51 C2 8.&3:R..9.....Q.
000130 BA 3D 00 9E BA 80 FC C8 39 1A 11 7D 3A 3E CB 3E .=......9..}:>.>
000140 B8 DE 25 20 BA 41 7B 2C B9 CC 3A E8 B9 EE 44 B9 ..% .A{,..:...D.
000150 B9 8D 87 23 39 94 B1 A0 B9 C8 A5 A9 B9 F7 39 D5 ...#9.........9.
000160 B9 86 5C A6 BA 75 6F 36 B9 C6 DB 0A 39 5A 8F E2 ..\..uo6....9Z..
data from trace 1 continues

210
5.1.3 SEG-Y File Structure
The following are the fields filled in SEG-Y header:

Reel header part 1 (EBCDIC):

Number 2: LINE x
Number 4: INSTRUMENT Geometrics StrataView
Number 5: TRACE/RECORD xxxxxxxx
Number 6: SAMPLE INTERVAL xxxxxxxx usec RECORD LEN xxxxxxx
Number 10: FILTERS LOW CUT xxxx HZ HIGH CUT xxxxxx HZ
NOTCH xxx HZ

Reel header part 2 (binary):

Byte 3205-3208: Line number
Byte 3213-3214: Number of traces
Byte 3217-3218: Sample Interval
Byte 3221-3222: Number of Samples
Byte 3225-3226: Data sample format code (2 = 4 bytes fixed
points)
Byte 3255-3256: Measurement system (2 = feet)

Trace header (binary):

Byte 9-12: Field record number
Byte 13-16: Trace number
Byte 29-30: Trace ID code (1 = seismic data)
Byte 31-32: Number of vertical stacks
Byte 33-34: Number of horizontal stacks (1)
Byte 71-72: Scalar (1)
Byte 73-76: Source coordinate - X
Byte 81-84: Group coordinate - X
Byte 115-116: Number of Samples
Byte 117-118: Sample Interval
Byte 145-146: Notch filter frequency
Byte 147-148: Notch filter slope
Byte 149-150: Low cut filter frequency
Byte 151-152: High cut filter frequency
Byte 153-154: Low cut filter slope
Byte 155-156: High cut filter slope
Byte 157-158: Year data
Byte 159-160: Day of year
Byte 161-162: Hour
Byte 163-164: Minute
Byte 165-166: Second
Byte 167-168: Time base code (1 = local)

Note: Value inside parenthesis is the default value in that

field. All filter information, if not used, will record as all
zeros.

211
5.2 Storage Capacity

The number of files which can be stored on a disk drive varies with the amount of disk or tape
space required for a seismic record, which of course depends on the number of channels, data
format, and record length.

To calculate the number of bytes required, multiply the (number of channels used) * (record length
in samples) * (number of bytes in a data word), then add some for the header information
(approximately 700 bytes for the file header and Nx600 bytes for the trace headers).

The amount of disk space or tape used depends on the record length as selected in the
Acquisition Timing menu. The number of bytes in a data word is 4 (for 32-bit data storage
format).

The following table shows the number of files stored for different media for some combinations
of channels, record length, and memory. These numbers are approximate.

Representative File Sizes

No. of Record File Files/1.44 Files per

Channels Length Size Mb Floppy Gigabyte
(samples)

12 2048 106K 12 9400

12 4096 204K 7 4900
12 8192 394K 3 2500
12 16396 794K 1 1250
24 2048 212K 6 4700
24 4096 410K 3 2400
24 8192 800K 1 1250
48 2048 423K 3 2300
48 4096 816K 1 1200
48 8192 1600K 0 600
60 2048 528K 2 1900
60 4096 1020K 1 1000

Warning. There are many combinations of record length which will not fit on a floppy disk. In
some cases you can solve this problem by running a file compression program. In others, it will
be necessary to write to an external SCSI device or to connect the seismograph to another
computer through the RS-232 port and use a file transfer program such as Lap-Link.
In general, the very long records will only be used with a vibrator source. Once the data is
correlated, the resultant file will be much shorter.

212
5.3 Support Disks

The StrataVisor and GeodeTM systems come with disks called "Support Disks" or in newer
version, a support CD. These include programs and data used to support the system. The seismic
program is included, along with sample data, and some additional files. The latest revisions to
the software, format, and operating instructions will be found here.

Geometrics has sample data sets for refraction and reflection surveys available on request.

5.3.1 Loading the seismic program

The operating software of the Geode and StrataVisor is stored on hard disk drive C:. The
software is normally resident in the system and will be loaded to configure the system as a
seismograph. This software may also be loaded from drive A: or occasionally by CD in the case
of a failure or, more commonly, to update the system software.

To load the new software, simply insert the support disk and follow the instructions on screen.

213
6 Applications

6.1 Continuous Seismic Recording Using the Geometrics

Geode

The Geode and NZ recording systems are capable of recording and transmitting data
continuously. Data are broken up into contiguous records of user defined length. Settings can be
adjusted so that there is overlap in the data, to facilitate recombination in processing. The
minimum sample rate possible is a function of the number of channels in a single line, the length
of the records that the data are cut into and highly dependent on the speed of the host computer.
As a general rule, the faster, the better.

For example, the following table shows possible sample interval and record length combinations
using a 16 channel Geode and a 1.8 MHz P4 CPU. By using a combination less channels, a faster
computer and/or multiple network cards, faster sample rates are possible

Geode Minimum Cycle Times While in Continuous Mode

Record Length (sec)-> 0.05 0.128 0.25 0.5 1 2
Sample Rate (usec)
21
31.25
62.5
125 0.25 0.5 1.2 1.95
250 0.3 0.5 1.2
500 0.128
1000 n/a
2000 n/a

Numbers are approximate and are affected by the performance of the recording computer.

Continuous recording
possible
Continuous recording not possible
Occasional misses

Continuously recorded data can be time stamped either with the PC clock (accurate about a
second per day) or the data can be synchronized using a pulse from a GPS fed to the trigger input.

214
6.1.1 Continuous Recording Using GPS Clock and Trigger
Timing Interface

In order to perform precisely timed continuous seismic recording using the standard Geometrics
Geode or NZ system, the GPS Clock & Trigger Timing Interface Kit (P/N 28132-01) is offered.
This kit consists of the following items:
Geometrics P/N Qty Description
1 20-700-605 1 TRUETIME GPS-605
2 28148-01 1 CABLE ASSY, 12V POWER FOR GPS-605
3 28133-01 1 TRIGGER TIMING INTERFACE
4 28129-01 1 CABLE ASSY, 12V POWER FOR 28133-01
5 26960-01 1 CBL ASSY, TRIGGER (BNC TO 3-PIN) L
6 60-230-237 1 CABLE ASSY, 9-PIN D MALE/FEMALE 6FT
7 60-303-004 1 BNC CABLE M-M, 5FT POMONA 2249-C-60
8 28149-01 1 DOC, GPS TRIGGER TIMING INTERFACE

Item 1 above, the TrueTime GPS-605 receiver, consists of a clock with mounting bracket, an
antenna, a 50ft antenna cable, and an operator’s manual. Check with the factory to discuss the
use of other manufacturer’s GPS units. The item 8 document describes the several modes of
operation of the timing interface. For the purpose of this paper, only the single controller,
continuous mode is pertinent.

In addition to the above, the standard Geode system is presumed to be available: Geode unit∗,
battery, power cable, geophone sensors, analog spread cable, customized Ethernet cable, Ethernet
cable adapter, and laptop PC with Ethernet adapter and Geometrics Seismic Controller Software
(SCS) installed. The SCS requires registration with at least the following options enabled:
• External Alarm Box Support Enabled
• Serial I/O Enabled
• Continuous Recording Enabled
• Trigger Window (recommended)
• Subsample Trigger Synchronization Enabled/Disabled (as required by the application)
The last option allows disabling of the sampling resynchronization at the time of each trigger
event. This may be desired to avoid the fractional sample interval time discontinuity which
otherwise may occur at that moment. But it also limits the timing accuracy of the samples
acquired after a trigger event to +/- 1 sample interval. See the Timing section below.

6.1.1.1 Hardware Setup

The Geode, its battery, and the laptop PC are set up in the standard manner as explained in the
Geode operator’s manual, with the exception of the trigger cable, as will be indicated below.

6.1.1.1.1 GPS:
• Position the GPS antenna to allow good “visibility” of as large sky area as possible. This
generally means locating it above or away from nearby conductive materials or massive
objects. To maintain constant lock on the GPS satellite signals, it must be able to receive
good reception from at least three satellites at all times.

∗
A single Geode is assumed here for simplicity, however, the concepts (but not
necessarily the performance) apply equally well to a multi-Geode system.

215
 • Using the cable provided with this optional kit, connect the antenna to the GPS clock
ANTENNA input.
• Use power cable 28148-01 to provide 12VDC power to the GPS clock unit, red clip to
+12VDC and black clip to 12VDC return (-). The power source may be the same as that
used for the Geode or a separate source. The display should immediately illuminate.
After a few minutes, lock should be obtained, indicated by the suppression of the decimal
point display segments.
• Use BNC cable 60-303-004 to connect the clock 1PPS output to the GPS Trigger Timing
Interface "1PPS" input.
• Use the RJ11-to-DB9 adapter cable provided with the GPS clock to connect the clock
RJ11 socket to the “GPS” DB9 connector on the GPS Trigger Timing Interface.

6.1.1.1.2 GPS Trigger Timing Interface

• The Trigger Timing Interface is pre-set by the factory for a specified trigger cycle time,
based on the GPS 1PPS clock input.∗ If this should need to be changed, the unit must be
opened by removing the two screws on the underside. A row of jumper selector pins,
labeled LK1 through LK16, will be visible on the printed circuit board. LK1 through
LK8 are involved in setting the cycle time. These eight positions constitute a binary
weighted value, with LK1 being the least significant bit. The selected value plus one is
the set cycle time. Thus, if no jumpers are inserted, a one-second cycle time would be
selected; with a jumper only at LK1, a two-second cycle time would be selected; with a
jumper only at LK2, a three-second cycle time would be selected. CAUTION: Do not
alter the jumper selections on any other part of the printed circuit board.
• Use power cable 28129-01 to provide 12VDC power to the GPS clock unit, red clip to
+12VDC and black clip to 12VDC return (-). The power source may be the same as that
used for the Geode, the GPS, or a separate source.
• Use cable 26960-01 to connect the "TRIG 1" output to the Geode trigger input (hammer
symbol), using an optional extension cable (P/N 23219-01) as required. (Note: the
trigger output is an isolated open-drain FET that relies on the 3.3K-Ohm pull-up-to-5V
resistor in the Geode trigger input circuitry.)
• Use serial cable 60-230-237 to connect the "CONTROLLER 1" DB9 connector to the
laptop serial port.

6.1.1.2 Software Setup

It is presumed here that the reader is already familiar with the customary operation of the Geode
software, either from experience or from the operator’s manual supplied with the Geode. Only
issues peculiar to the continuous recording application are addressed here.

In order to setup the key software parameters correctly to achieve continuous recording, two
requirements of the method should be understood:

∗
A modification of the Trigger Timing Interface has can be provided for custom
applications, according to Customs and Specials Build Document #1008. Accordingly, a
16-position binary rotary switch has been added to the front panel and wired internally to
selector pins in order to provide externally selectable trigger cycle times of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9,
11, … 27, 29, or 31 seconds.

216
 1) The trigger delay should equal the negative of the record length. This condition means
that the data record is ended by the trigger event, rather than the more usual case of being
started by the trigger event. The importance of this is that the entire record is acquired
and ready to be transmitted when the trigger event occurs.
2) The recorded data will be “continuous” (actually, sequential records will overlap) only if
the achievable cycle time is less than the record length. In other words, if the actual cycle
time is ever greater than the record length, then a gap in the data will result, making it
discontinuous at that point. Achieving this requirement depends on a number of factors,
some of which cannot be precisely controlled. Some of these factors are: the amount of
data per record (which depends on the number of active recording channels and the
sample rate), the data transmission speed to the laptop, the speed of the laptop PC, the
writing speed to the hard drive, the tasks within the SCS that must occur for each record,
and any other tasks that may be running which compete with the SCS for processor time.

A list of the important menu parameters follows. Some of these are directly affected by the two
requirements given above.

Acquisition menu
Sample Interval
Record Length
Delay: (= -Record length)
Stack Options: REPLACE ONLY
Specify Channels: set to “DATA” those channels needed, others to “INACTIVE”
File menu
Storage Parameters
Auto Save: checked
Save to Disk: checked
Display menu
Trigger Parameters
Cycle Time Scale: Cycle time of GPS Trigger Timing Interface, plus a fraction more
System menu
Trigger Options
Holdoff 0.0s
Arm Mode: Auto
Sensitivity: near mid scale
Alarms Setup
Configure Alarm Box
Serial Input Enabled: checked
Geometrics Alarm Box Enabled: checked
Baud Rate: 4800
Byte Size: 8
Parity Bit: None
Stop Bits: 1 Stop Bit
Terminator: LF
Serial Input Setup - Replace PC time Stamp with GPS time: checked
Advanced Acquisition Options
Enable or Disable Subsample Trigger Synchronization: as required by application
Enable Continuous Acquisition: checked

When the recoding parameters and environment are selected for the first time, it is recommended
that the actual cycle time be checked to ensure that requirement 2) is met. The Trigger Window

217
is most helpful for this purpose. Observe over the time span of a larger number of records
whether or not the trigger cycle time exceeds the cycle time expected from the GPS Trigger
Timing Interface. Be aware that PC interrupts can cause occasional triggering misses. If the
observed performance is unacceptable, then adjustments must be made to increase the margin in
order to maintain confidence in the capability of continuous recording with no gaps. Some of the
obvious adjustments are:
• Reduce the number of recording channels by setting more of the highest numbered
channels inactive.
• Increase the sample interval.
• Reduce the record length (i.e., the overlap), but not such that it is less than or equal to the
desired cycle time (and remember to adjust the delay accordingly).
• Use a faster PC and/or hard drive.
Some of the less obvious adjustments:
• Reduce the relative overhead per record by increasing both the GPS Trigger Timer
Interface cycle time and the record length (and delay).
• Reduce the workload created by unnecessary windows in the SCS. For example, reduce
the number of channels in the spectral window, if any. (Note that simply minimizing a
window has little effect.) Registering the software without the extra windows (spectral,
gather, etc.) is the best way.
• Minimize the background tasks running by uninstalling whatever software is not needed.

The degree of margin can be ascertained by temporarily disconnecting the Geode trigger input
and then setting the trigger sensitivity (under Trigger options in the System menu) to the
maximum (100). In this mode the Geode will self-trigger as fast as possible and the margin
relative to the desired cycle time can be observed in the Trigger window.

6.1.1.3 Timing
The SCS log window normally records the time at which each file is saved, based on the PC
clock. But with the “Serial Input Setup - Replace PC time Stamp with GPS time” checked in the
Alarm Setup menu, the software will substitute the GPS serial time stamp as it is received. (Note
that should there be a failure in the serial communication, the logged time will revert to PC time.
Inspection of consecutively logged times can clear up any confusion since GPS time always
shows exact second intervals.) The GPS time stamp indicates the time of the previous rising edge
of the GPS 1PPS clock pulse, which is also the time at which the Geode is triggered.♣ Should the
GPS lose lock on the satellites, it will continue issuing the 1PPS clock and the serial time stamp,
but based on its own internal time base, which is subject to drift. Loss of lock is indicated by the
illumination of all decimal points in the display, and by the “?” symbol appended to the end of the
time stamp in the log file.

With Subsample Trigger Synchronization (in System menu, Advanced Acquisition Options)
disabled (i.e., no sample stretch at time of trigger), the last sample in a file record would represent

♣
From what has been described thus far, the GPS serial cable could be routed directly to the
laptop PC, bypassing the GPS Trigger Timing Interface. However, the Interface serves two
purposes, which may or may not be important for the application: to direct the time stamp to two
PCs in the case of two controllers, and to receive the alarm information from the controller(s)
over the same serial cable.

218
the time of the trigger edge +0/-1 sample interval. The first sample in the record would be
similarly uncertain, plus any drift of the Geode 15ppm time base∗ over the time interval.

With Subsample Trigger Synchronization enabled (i.e., possible sample stretch at time of trigger),
the timing of all samples, after a trigger event until the next trigger event, can be known to +/-
1/32 of a sample interval#, plus any 15ppm drift. (But be aware that the overlapped portion of the
record would be synchronized to a different GPS pulse, thus removing the accumulated drift at
that point). Because the shot window display and the recorded file are based on the trigger that
came after the data, they could indicate a one-sample error in timing. To recover the accurate
time, one must find the location in the data file of the trigger that occurred near the beginning of
the file (i.e., at the end of the previous file). This would be right after the data that overlaps the
previous file. The overlapped portion is easy to identify because the data values recorded in that
portion at the beginning of one file are identical to the values at the end of the previous file.
Subsequent data in the file would be at a known time relative to that trigger (after applying the
sample skew correction recorded in the SEG-2 file header) to within the accuracy stated.

Also note that, because of the Geode time base drift relative to the GPS clock, the amount of
overlap in a pair of sequential files can occasionally be one sample more or less than usual,
depending on the direction of drift.

6.1.1.4 Alarm
The alarm function of the GPS Trigger Timing Interface may or may not be important for a
continuous recording application. It would be typically used for a remote monitoring situation in
which it is critical that recording “down time” be minimized. Document 28149-01 describes the
alarm functions in general. Here, a few comments will be made concerning the Alarm Setup
menu in the SCS, which are particularly pertinent to continuous recording.

The Alarm Setup menu is used to control which events produce which alarm indications with
what tolerance. For example, the “Max Serial string not detected” entry may be used to alert the
operator after a chosen number of serial time stamps from the GPS have been missed.

Missed triggers resulting in data gaps may be monitored by using the “Max incomplete shot…”
line. For no tolerance for this kind of failure, enter “1” in the first field and the expected cycle
time in the second field. The next line, “Max consecutive incomplete shot”, may be used to allow
isolated misses. For this, set up entries in the previous line, whether or not the alarm warnings
are set to “OFF”.

The “Alarm Idle. Reset Counter” button is used to clear the alarm state from the GPS Trigger
Timer Interface, and to reset the event counters within the menu.

∗
Each channel within a Geode uses the same time base and so would experience the same drift.
However, each Geode has its own time base so channels in different Geodes could experience
different drifts.
#
At the higher sampling rates, the uncertainty increases somewhat, to about +/- 1/20 of a sample
interval for the fastest sampling.

219
6.1.2 Continuous Recording Using The Internal PC Clock
It is possible to continuously trigger the
Geode or NZ seismograph without using the
optional GPS and trigger timing interface
kit. Geode/ES-3000 and NX seismographs
are capable of triggering themselves, using
the maximum trigger sensitivity settings
under the system menu. When the Trigger
Sensitivity slider is moved all the way to the
right to the High sensitivity setting, the
seismograph will continue to trigger
repeatedly. Data records will be time
stamped by the PC clock instead of the
more accurate GPS clock.

6.1.2.1 Software Setup

It is presumed here that the reader is already familiar with the customary operation of the
Geode software, either from experience or from the operator’s manual supplied with the
Geode. Only issues peculiar to the continuous recording application are addressed here.

In order to setup the key software parameters correctly to achieve continuous recording,
two requirements of the method should be understood:
1) The trigger delay should equal the negative of the record length. This
condition means that the data record is ended by the trigger event, rather
than the more usual case of being started by the trigger event. The
importance of this is that the entire record is acquired and ready to be
transmitted when the trigger event occurs.
2) The recorded data will be “continuous” (actually, sequential records will
overlap) only if the achievable cycle time is less than the record length. In
other words, if the actual cycle time is ever greater than the record length,
then a gap in the data will result, making it discontinuous at that point.
Achieving this requirement depends on a number of factors, some of
which cannot be precisely controlled. Some of these factors are: the
amount of data per record (which depends on the number of active
recording channels and the sample rate), the data transmission speed to the
laptop, the speed of the laptop PC, the writing speed to the hard drive, the
tasks within the SCS that must occur for each record, and any other tasks
that may be running which compete with the SCS for processor time.

A list of the important menu parameters follows. Some of these are directly affected by
the two requirements given above.

Acquisition menu
Sample Interval
Record Length

220
 Delay: (= -Record length)
Stack Options: REPLACE ONLY
Specify Channels: set to “DATA” those channels needed, others to “INACTIVE”
File menu
Storage Parameters
Auto Save: checked
Save to Disk: checked
Display menu
Trigger Parameters
Cycle Time Scale: Cycle time of GPS Trigger Timing Interface, plus a fraction
more
System menu
Trigger Options
Holdoff 0.0s
Arm Mode: Auto
Sensitivity: near mid scale
Advanced Acquisition Options
Enable or Disable Subsample Trigger Synchronization: as required by application
Enable Continuous Acquisition: checked
Calibration Mode
Change calibration mode from every shot to many shots (99999)

When the recoding parameters and environment are selected for the first time, it is
recommended that the actual cycle time be checked to ensure that requirement 2) is met.
The Trigger Window is most helpful for this purpose. Observe over the time span of a
larger number of records whether or not the trigger cycle time exceeds the cycle time
expected from the length of the records. Be aware that PC interrupts can cause
occasional triggering misses. If the observed performance is unacceptable, then
adjustments must be made to increase the margin in order to maintain confidence in the
capability of continuous recording with no gaps. Some of the obvious adjustments are:
• Reduce the number of recording channels by setting more of the highest
numbered channels inactive.
• Increase the sample interval.
• Reduce the record length (i.e., the overlap), but not such that it is less than or
equal to the desired cycle time (and remember to adjust the delay accordingly).
• Use a faster PC and/or hard drive.
Some of the less obvious adjustments:
• Reduce the relative overhead per record by both increasing the record length and
decreasing the sample rate
• Reduce the workload created by unnecessary windows in the SCS. For example,
reduce the number of channels in the spectral window, if any. (Note that simply
minimizing a window has little effect.) Registering the software without the extra
windows (spectral, gather, etc.) is the best way.
• Minimize the background tasks running by uninstalling whatever software is not
needed.

221
6.2 Sub-Bottom Profiling

Contact us at Geometrics for documentation discussing sub-bottom profiling

6.3 Surveillance

ES-3000, Geodes and StrataVisor NZ seismographs can be configured to operate as

surveillance monitors using the self-trigger algorithm. A warning box can be displayed
upon detection, and the specific trigger channels are written into the log file to alert the
operator that an event has been identified.

To configure surveillance mode:

1. Turn on self-trigger mode in

the Trigger Options dialog
box.
2. Select whether you wish to use
OR or AND channels for
dectection. It is our experience
that OR channels work best for
local events like humans or
animals walking. AND channels work best for distant events like trucks or
aircraft. Note that the number of AND channels used to generate a trigger can be
specified.
3. Set the length of the two adjacent detection windows w2 and w1 as well as the
threshold. This will require some experimentation, depending on the event that
you are trying to detect. It is best if you can simulate the situation in real life, and
set these parameters accordingly. To detect a person walking in a noisy traffic
area, we set time window w1 to 5 and time window w2 to 5 with a threshold ratio
w2/w1 of 2. Window w1 measures background and w2 measures the event.
4. In the SYSTEMS>ALARMS SETUP dialog box, check the Report Self-Trigger
alarm.
5. Set the acquisition parameters accordingly to define the record length and sample
rate of the file that you would like to capture. This captured file can be used for
more detailed data analysis, for example to determine the type of intruder or
vehicle.
6. If you are not interested in saving records but only wish to use the self-trigger
algorithm for detection:
a. Set the record length to a very small value
b. Set the sample interval to the smallest value

222
 c. Turn off Auto Save in the FILE menu
d. Turn on Calibrate Every 99999 shots saved in the SYSTEM>Calibrate
mode dialog box. These changes will allow the system to recover very
quickly so there is virtually no dead time in which an event might not be
detected.
7. A detailed description of the operation of the self-trigger algorithm can be found
in chapter 2.

Above is shown a screen capture of detected event. Note

• alarm box indicating the number of channels that detected the event
• log file window showing channels that detected the event
• noise monitor window showing real-time waterfall display of the event
• spectral and shot windows recorded at higher sample rate for post-acquisition
analysis

Shown opposite is the self-trigger

dialog box settings used to detect the
event shown above.

223
Appendix A. Specifications

StrataVisor NZ and Geode Seismographs

Configurations: 3, 6, 8, 12, 16 or 24 channels in weatherproof field deployable Geode module. Geode is operated from either
98/NT/2K/XP based laptop1 or by Geometrics’ ruggedized StrataVisor NZ field computer. Single Geodes are operated using SGOS
software, which contains basic seismograph functions used for engineering surveys. Multiple Geodes can be connected together to
build systems with many channels and many lines using MGOS software.

A/D Conversion: 24 bit result using Crystal Semiconductor sigma-delta converters and Geometrics proprietary over sampling.

Dynamic Range: 144 dB (system), 110 dB (instantaneous, measured) at 2 ms, 24 dB.

Distortion: 0.0005% @ 2 ms, 1.75 to 208 Hz.

Bandwidth: 1.75 Hz to 20 kHz. Low corner frequency option available.

Common Mode Rejection: > 100dB at <= 100 Hz, 36 dB.

Crosstalk: -125 dB at 23.5 Hz, 24 dB, 2 ms.

Noise Floor: 0.20 uV, RFI at 2 ms, 36 dB, 1.75 to 208 Hz.

Stacking Trigger Accuracy: 1/32 of sample interval.

Maximum Input Signal: 2.8V PP at 0dB

Input Impedance: 20 kOhm, 0.02 uf.

Preamplifier Gains: Software selectable between 24 and 36 dB. Can be jumpered to allow selection of 12 or 24 dB or jumpered to 0
dB.

Anti-alias Filters: -3 dB at 83% of Nyquist frequency, down 90 dB.

Acquisition and Display Filters:

Low Cut: OUT, 10, 15, 25, 35, 50, 70, 100, 140, 200, 280, 400 Hz, 24 or 48 dB/octave, Butterworth.
Notch: 50, 60, 150, 180 Hz and OUT, with the 50 dB rejection bandwidth 2% of center frequency.
High Cut: OUT, 250, 500 or 1000 Hz, 24 or 48 dB/ octave.

Sample Interval: 0.02, 0.03125, 0.0625, 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, 16.0 ms.

Correlation: Optional high-speed hardware correlator available in each Geode for fast cycle time with vibrators and pseudo-random
(MiniSosie) sources2.

Maximum Record Length: 16,384 samples per channel standard, 65,536 samples per channel optional.

Pre-trigger Data: Up to 4,096 Samples.

Delay: 0 to 9999 ms in 1 sample interval steps.

Data Transmission: Uses reliable Ethernet connections and requires no custom transmission software. Interfaces directly with
network capabilities of Windows 98/NT/2K/XP.

Auxiliary Channels: All Geode channels can be programmed as either AUX or DATA. Fixed data and aux channels available in
StrataVisor NZ.

Roll Along: Built-in, no external roll box required.

Line Testing: Real time noise monitor displays real-time output from geophones. Optional geophones pulse test helps identify bad
geophones and shorted or broken cables2.

Instrument Tests: Optional built-in daily, weekly and monthly testing available2. External laboratory quality test system available to
measure noise, crosstalk, dynamic range, gain similarity and trigger accuracy to factory specification.

Data Formats: SEG-2 standard with SGOS. SEG-D and SEG-Y available2.

System Software:

224
Single Geode Operating Software (SGOS): Includes full compliment of acquisition, display, plotting, filtering and storage features.
Multiple Geode Operating Software (MGOS): Allows single laptop to control multiple Geodes and adds additional preamp gains,
correlation, expanded record length, tape writing, geophone pulse test, expanded test and diagnostics and roll along capability.

StrataVisor NZ Software: Functionally similar to MGOS above but operates on ruggedized NZ field system.

Data Storage: Stores data locally on laptop hard drive for transfer to portable media2.

Plotters: Drives a variety of NT compatible printers including Printrex 4, 8 and 12 inch plotters. Consult factory.

Triggering: Positive, negative or contact closure, software adjustable threshold.

Power: Requires 12V external battery. Uses 0.65W/channel during acquisition, sleep mode reduces power consumption by 70% while
in standby.

Environmental: Geode:-30 to 70degrees C. Waterproof and submersible. Withstands a 1 m drop onto concrete on 6 sides and 8
corners. NZ: Starts from +5oC to 40oC. Operates from –5oC to 45oC.

Physical: Geode: 12.2"L x 9 3/4"W x 7"D (31cmL x 24.75cmW x 17.75cm), weighs 3.5 kg.
NZ field PC with no channels: 10.5“L x 18"W x 21“D (26.7cmL x 45.7 cmW x 53.34 cmD), weighs 30 lb (13.5 kg)
Seismic recorder with 3-64 internal channels: 10.5“L x 18"W x 13 “D (26.7cm L x 45.7 cmW x 33 cmD), weighs 20 lb (9 kg)

Operating System: Windows 98/NT/XP/2000.

Data Processing and Interpretation: Includes refraction software with first break picking, layer assignment, depth below each
geophone using delay time, refraction tomography and reflection processing software. Consult factory for individual data sheets.

1- Laptop computers are NOT field devices. They are easily damaged by harsh treatment or exposure to extreme environments. They
have a short battery life. Geometrics StrataVisor NZ is designed to operate in harsh conditions for extended periods and should be
used with the Geode for professional surveys when reliability is important..

2 - Available with MGOS software only.

ES-3000 Seismographs
Configurations: 8 and 12 channels in weatherproof field deployable module. ES-3000 is operated from Windows 98/NT/2K/XP
based laptop1

A/D Conversion: 24 bit result using Crystal Semiconductor sigma-delta converters and Geometrics proprietary over sampling.

Dynamic Range: 144 dB (system), 110 dB (instantaneous, measured) at 2 ms, 24 dB.

Distortion: 0.0005% @ 2 ms, 1.75 to 208 Hz.

Bandwidth: 1.75 Hz to 8 kHz.

Common Mode Rejection: > 100dB at <= 100 Hz, 36 dB.

Crosstalk: -125 dB at 23.5 Hz, 24 dB, 2 ms.

Noise Floor: 0.20 uV, RFI at 2 ms, 36 dB, 1.75 to 208 Hz.

Stacking Trigger Accuracy: 1/32 of sample interval.

Maximum Input Signal: 175 mV PP at 24dB

Input Impedance: 20 kOhm, 0.02 uf.

Preamplifier Gains: Software selectable between 24 and 36 dB.

Anti-alias Filters: -3 dB at 83% of Nyquist frequency, down 90 dB.

Acquisition and Display Filters:

Low Cut: OUT, 10, 15, 25, 35, 50, 70, 100, 140, 200, 280, 400 Hz, 24 or 48 dB/octave, Butterworth.
Notch: 50, 60, 150, 180 Hz and OUT, with the 50 dB rejection bandwidth 2% of center frequency.
High Cut: OUT, 250, 500 or 1000 Hz, 24 or 48 dB/ octave.

225
Sample Interval: 0.0625, 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 ms.

Maximum Record Length: 4,096 samples per channel standard.

Pre-trigger Data: Up to 4,096 Samples.

Delay: 0 to 9999 ms in 1 sample interval steps.

Data Transmission: Uses reliable Ethernet connections and requires no custom transmission software. Interfaces directly with
network capabilities of Windows 98/NT/2K/XP.

Auxiliary Channels: All ES-3000 channels can be programmed as either AUX or DATA. Fixed data and aux channels available in
StrataVisor NZ.

Data Formats: SEG-2 standard.

System Software:

ES-3000 Operating Software (ESOS): Includes full compliment of acquisition, display, plotting, filtering and storage
features.

Data Storage: Stores data locally on laptop hard drive for transfer to portable media2.

Plotters: Drives a variety of NT compatible printers including Printrex 4, 8 and 12 inch plotters. Consult factory.

Triggering: Positive, negative or contact closure, software adjustable threshold.

Power: Requires 12V external battery. Uses 0.65W/channel during acquisition, sleep mode reduces power consumption by 70% while
in standby.

Environmental: ES-3000:-30 to 70 degrees C. Waterproof and submersible. Withstands a 1 m drop onto concrete on 6 sides and 8
corners.

Physical: ES-3000: 12.2"L x 9 3/4"W x 7"D (31cmL x 24.75cmW x 17.75cm), weighs 3.5 kg.

Operating System: Windows 98/NT/XP/2000.

Data Processing and Interpretation: Includes refraction software with first break picking, layer assignment, depth below each
geophone using delay time, refraction tomography and reflection processing software. Consult factory for individual data sheets.

1- Laptop computers are NOT field devices. They are easily damaged by harsh treatment or exposure to extreme environments. They
have a short battery life. Geometrics StrataVisor NZ is designed to operate in harsh conditions for extended periods and should be
used with the Geode for professional surveys when reliability is important..

2 – Some additional features are available as options.

226
Appendix B. PCMCIA Card and Software Installation

Installing your PCMCIA Card

Geodes can be controlled either by the StrataVisor NZ or by a laptop or desktop computer. If you
are using a laptop computer, the most common configuration is to install a PCMCIA card in the
card bay found on the side.

There are many variations in the PCMCIA cards that we have tried at Geometrics, and to date,
have not found any network cards that do not work. However, you should try your card before
going to the field to guard against incompatibilities.. Note that all systems purchased from us
should have a PCMCIA card included.

To install, follow the instructions that come with your PCMCIA card. Remember, SGOS and
MGOS software work only under Windows ME, NT, 98 and 95. See our web site at
www.geometrics.com for information on newer versions.

Checking Your Network Settings

These instructions may vary slightly with different

versions of the Windows operating system. To check
and see if your network card installed successfully, or
to check if you have a network card already installed
and the appropriate driver is operating, go to the
Windows START button, select SETTINGS and
choose CONTROL PANEL. In the CONTROL
PANEL folder, select NETWORK and you will be
presented with the menu opposite.

If you select ADAPTERS, you should be shown a

menu similar to one opposite, shown from the
Windows NT operating system. Users of Windows 98
or Windows 95 will see something similar. This
indicates that the network card has been installed
properly and should be accessible from the Geode
operating software.

Installing Your Geode Software

Geode Seismic Controller software (SCS)

comes on floppy disks, CD ROM or can be
downloaded from our web site. If the
software does not automatically start, run the
program SETUP and follow the instructions
provided. Screens are self-explanatory, and if
you make a wrong selection, you can press
the BACK button to reverse any changes

227
Note: We strongly suggest that you exit all Windows programs before installing the software to
avoid conflicts. The software will be installed in a default directory, unless you specify otherwise.
.

The installation is self-guiding, please follow the instructions on screen. Some menus require
additional explanation.

There are four installations options:

• Compact (smallest
space possible)
• Custom (allows you to
choose which options
you require)
• Full installation (all
tape support, 3rd party
tools, recommended
for most users)
• Full installation with
no tape drive (does not
install ASPI drivers for
those systems for
which there may be a
system conflict with
SCSI devices)

228
If you choose the CUSTOM installation, you will be presented with the following menu:

There are multiple options from which to choose:

• Seismodule Controller (basic operating software for the system). Always keep this option
selected
• Tape Support (drivers for handling external SCSI tape devices)
• Standard Filters (real time digital acquisition filters)
• Test Box Script Files (needed if you own a Geometrics test system)
• Survey Description Templates
• Applications Sounds (WAV files for alerting operator of different acquisitions states)
• Tools

o Tape and disk data reader (separate program)

o Geode/NZ Bios Flash programmer (programs the firmware on the acquisition
boards
o SEG2 to ASCII convert utility
o SeisImager refraction processing package
o SIPQC refraction package

You should leave all options checked unless you have a specific reason for removing them.
Depending on your application, some parts of the M/SGOS operating software may not work
properly, should you remove one.

See sections in the Quick Start Guide and in Chapter One to connect your Geode/ES-3000 and
laptop together and start the system.

229
Changing Imbedded Software Options After Installation

If you have already installed the SCS software, you can make changes after installation via the
SETTINGS>CONTROL PANEL>ADD/REMOVE PROGRAMS directly in Windows.

By clicking on the Change/Remove button, you

are presented with the menu opposite:

230
By selecting the MODIFY button
and clicking NEXT, you can
review your installation
instructions, shown in the opposite
menu.
Select or deselect the options that
you require and press NEXT to
modify your SCS software.

231
Appendix C: Sample Data

Additional data sets are available on our downloads page at www.geometrics.com.

232
Appendix D: Applications software that ships with the Geode and
StrataVisor NZ seismographs.

This shipment contains industry-leading applications software to help you get the most
from your new Geometrics Geode or StrataVisor seismograph. The applications software
will help you analyze and process your data so you get answers quickly, for yourself and
your clients.

All software that can be launched from the seismograph program is preloaded on the
StrataVisor seismograph, on a PC Geode controller (if purchased directly from
Geometrics), and on your installation disks. If you are planning to use your own PC
Geode controller, the software will be automatically loaded on your system when you
install the Geode SGOS or MGOS operating program from the installation disks. There
are two stand-alone packages, WinSeis Lite and WinSeis Turbo. These are reflection data
processing packages and it is more practical to load them separately on the analysis PC
where they will be used.

All of the applications software packages are fully functional for analyzing your data,
but usually limit the amount of data that can be analyzed. The full-featured packages
are available either directly from Geometrics, Inc. or from the vendors listed below.
The packages included with your Geode or StrataVisor are as follows.

• SIPQC refraction analysis software (delay-time method), from Rimrock

Geophysics, P/N 26101-02. For support, please contact us, or Rimrock at
[email protected] and 303-985-2522 (tel).

• SeisImager/2D refraction and modeling software (time-term inversion, delay-

time, and tomographic inversion methods), P/N 26112-01. For support, please
contact us.

• WinSeis Lite reflection processing software (with Geode only) from the Kansas
Geological Survey (KGS), P/N 26100-08. For registration and support, please
contact the KGS at [email protected] and 785-864-2176 (tel).

• WinSeis Turbo reflection processing software (with StrataVisor NZ only) from

the KGS, P/N 26100-03. For registration and support, please contact the KGS at
[email protected] and 785-864-2176 (tel).

• Other experimental software may be on the system for your trial and assessment

The launchable software can be accessed from the ANSWERS menu, located on the main
toolbar of the seismograph program. Some of the packages are best used with a mouse
and keyboard connected; SeisImager/2D requires a mouse for operation. Support on all
packages is available either from Geometrics or directly from the software vendor, as
listed above, and support documentation is included with your shipment. We would be

233
pleased to help you interpret your first refraction data set to ensure that you
understand the software and are able to use it to its fullest. Please contact the
Geometrics Sales Department at 408-954-0522 (tel) or [email protected] to arrange
an appointment. Real-time on-screen help is available through Microsoft NETMEETING
over your high-speed Internet connection.

234